Ricoh Aficio MP C4502 Service Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Ricoh Manuals
  4. All in One Printer
  5. Aficio MP C4502
  6. Service manual
Ricoh Aficio MP C4502 Service Manual

Ricoh Aficio MP C4502 Service Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for Aficio MP C4502:
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
More Service Manuals at www.service-manual.net
D143/D1444
SERVICE MANUAL
WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the Aficio MP C4502 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Ricoh Aficio MP C4502

Summary of Contents for Ricoh Aficio MP C4502

  • Page 1 More Service Manuals at www.service-manual.net D143/D1444 SERVICE MANUAL WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 2 It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh Americas Corporation and its member companies. NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR PERMISSION OF RICOH AMERICAS CORPORATION.
  • Page 3 Ricoh Technical Training Program. Untrained uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual to repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warranty protection. Ricoh Americas Corporation WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 4: Documentation History

    LEGEND COMPANY PRODUCT CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN D143 MP C4502 Aficio MP C4502 MP C4502 D144 MP C5502 Aficio MP C5502 MP C5502 DOCUMENTATION HISTORY REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS 02/2012 Original Printing WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    D143/D144 TABLE OF CONTENTS PRODUCT INFORMATION ............1-1     SPECIFICATIONS ..................1-1     PRODUCT OVERVIEW ................1-2     1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............1-2     1.2.2   PAPER PATH ................... 1-4   1.2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ................1-5  ...
  • Page 6 2.2.4   EXTERNAL USB KEYBOARD (EXTERNAL OPTION) ....2-26   2.2.5 MOVING THE MACHINE ..............2-27     2.2.6   TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE ..........2-27   PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION (D580) ........... 2-28     2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ..............2-28  ...
  • Page 7 Support Tray Installation ..............2-67   2.14 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 3030 (D570) ............2-68     2.14.1   COMPONENT CHECK ............... 2-68   2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........2-69     Installation Procedure ................ 2-69   2.15   KEY COUNTER BRACKET TYPE H (A674) ........2-74  ...
  • Page 8 2.21.7   IEEE 802.11A/G G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J/K ....... 2-99   Installation Procedure ................ 2-99   Installing Various Hardware Combinations ........2-100   UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN ..........2-100   SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g g Wireless LAN ......................
  • Page 9 Adjustment Procedure ................4-7   4.3.4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT ............. 4-8     4.3.5   COLOR REGISTRATION ..............4-9   Line Position Adjustment ..............4-9   4.3.6 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION........... 4-9     Copy Mode ..................4-10   Printer Mode ..................4-15  ...
  • Page 10 Error Messages .................. 4-43   4.6.3 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ........... 4-44     Preparing the new laser optics housing unit ........4-44   Before removing the old laser optics housing unit ......4-45   Recovery procedure for no replacement preparation of laser optics housing unit .....................
  • Page 11 When installing the drive unit ............. 4-87   Adjustment after replacing the gear unit ..........4-88   4.10.2   REGISTRATION MOTOR............4-89   4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR ............... 4-90     4.10.4 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTORS FOR M, C, AND Y ....4-91  ...
  • Page 12 When installing the paper exit fan ............ 4-124   4.11.16 AC CONTROLLER BOARD FAN ........... 4-125     When installing the AC controller fan ..........4-125   4.11.17 FUSING ENTRANCE THERMOPILES ........4-126     When cleaning the lens of the thermopile ........4-126  ...
  • Page 13 Controller Box Open ................. 4-153   4.14.2 CONTROLLER UNIT ..............4-154     4.14.3   CONTROLLER BOX RIGHT COVER ........4-155   4.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX ..............4-155     When opening the controller box ............4-155   When removing the controller box ............ 4-156  ...
  • Page 14 4.15.4   ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ............. 4-183   4.15.5 ORIGINAL FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER ..... 4-184     4.15.6   ORIGINAL SEPARATION ROLLER ......... 4-185   4.15.7 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR ........4-186     4.15.8 ADF CONTROL BOARD ............4-187  ...
  • Page 15 SP Mode Button Summary ..............5-2   Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ... 5-3   Selecting the Program Number ............5-4   Exiting Service Mode................5-5   Service Mode Lock/Unlock ..............5-5   5.1.4   REMARKS ..................
  • Page 16 Copier ....................5-392   ARDF (D630) ................... 5-400   1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) ............. 5-401   2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636) ......5-402   Bridge Unit (D386)/ Side Tray (D634) ..........5-403   Shift Tray (D633) ................5-404   1 Bin Tray (D632) ................5-404  ...
  • Page 17 5.16.1   INFORMATION LIST ..............5-435   5.16.2 DOWNLOAD ................5-435     5.16.3   UPLOAD ................... 5-436   5.17 USING THE DEBUG LOG ............... 5-437     5.17.1 OVERVIEW ................5-437     5.17.2   SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG ..5-438  ...
  • Page 18 6.1.7   SERVICE CALL TABLES - 6 ............6-47   SC6xx: Device Communication ............6-47   6.1.8   SERVICE CALL TABLES - 7 ............6-59   SC7xx: Peripherals ................6-59   6.1.9 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 8 ............6-74    ...
  • Page 19 6.4.1   PAPER JAM DISPLAY ..............6-129   6.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES ........... 6-129     Paper Size Code ................6-136   Sensor Locations ................6-137   ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ..........6-138     6.5.1   SENSORS ..................6-138  ...
  • Page 20 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 21: Prevention Of Physical Injury

    READ THIS FIRST Important Safety Notices Prevention of Physical Injury Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals, make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.

  • Page 22: Safety And Ecological Notes For Disposal

     The Controller board on this machine contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists if a battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or an equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Discard batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

  • Page 23: Warnings, Cautions, Notes

     WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laser beams can seriously damage your eyes.  CAUTION MARKING: Warnings, Cautions, Notes In this manual, the following important symbols and notations are used. ...

  • Page 24: Symbols, Abbreviations And Trademarks

    Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations are as follows: See or Refer to Clip ring Screw Connector Clamp E-ring Short Edge Feed Long Edge Feed Trademarks ® ® ®...

  • Page 25: Product Information

    PRODUCT INFORMATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 26 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 27: Specifications

    Specifications 1. PRODUCT INFORMATION 1.1 SPECIFICATIONS See "Appendices" for the following information:  General Specifications  Supported Paper Sizes  Software Accessories  Optional Equipment D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 28: Product Overview

    Product Overview 1.2 PRODUCT OVERVIEW 1.2.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 29 Product Overview 1. Scanner HP sensor 14. Paper transfer roller 2. ADF exposure glass 15. Registration roller 3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage) 16. By-pass feed table 4. Exposure glass 17. Tray 2 5. 1st scanner (1st carriage) 18. Tray 1 6.

  • Page 30: Paper Path

    Product Overview 1.2.2 PAPER PATH 1. Original tray 9. Tray 5: Optional LCT 1200 2. Original exit tray 10. Tray 4: Optional paper feed unit 3. Duplex inverter 11. Finisher booklet stapler (Optional) 4. Duplex feed 12. Finisher stapler (Optional) 5.

  • Page 31: Drive Layout

    Product Overview 1.2.3 DRIVE LAYOUT 1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit. 2. Toner supply clutch-K and Turns on/off the drive power to the toner supply unit (K -CMY: and -CMY). 3.ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Moves the ITB into contact and away from the color contact motor: PCDUs.
  • Page 32 Product Overview 7. Paper feed clutch Switches the drive power between tray 1 and tray 2. 8. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2). Turns on/off the drive power to the by-pass pick-up, 9. By-pass feed clutch: feed and separation rollers.

  • Page 33: Machine Codes And Peripherals Configuration

    Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration 1.3 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION Item Machine Code Call out Remarks Single pass ADF model Mainframe D143/D144 has ADF as standard. Platen cover D593 One from the two for all models except the single ARDF D630 pass ADF model...
  • Page 34 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine Code Call out Remarks Punch unit 2/3 holes D570-00 (NA) Requires [10] Punch unit 2/4 holes D570-01 (EU) Requires [10] D570-02 Punch unit 4 holes Requires [10] (Scandinavia) One from [9] and [10]; 1000-sheet finisher D588 Requires [11] and one...
  • Page 35 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration Item Machine code Call out Remark Gigabit Ethernet D377-21 IEEE 1284 B679-17 Wireless LAN D377-01 (NA) (IEEE 802.11a/g) D377-02 (EU/AA) You can only install one of these at a time. Wireless LAN D377-19 (EU) (IEEE 802.11g) File Format Converter D377-04 Bluetooth (USB)
  • Page 36 Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration D645-17 (NA) Browser Unit D645-24 (EU) D645-25 (AA) SD Card for Netware D645-23 Printing This card should already PDF Direct / VM / be in SD slot 1 (upper) App2Me Card (Standard) when the machine leaves the factory.

  • Page 37: Guidance For Those Who Are Familiar With Predecessor Products

    Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products 1.4 GUIDANCE FOR THOSE WHO ARE FAMILIAR WITH PREDECESSOR PRODUCTS Machines D143/D144 are successor models to Machines D088/D089. If you have experience with the predecessor products, the following information will be of help when you read this manual. Different Points from Predecessor Products Item D143/D144...
  • Page 38 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 39: Installation

    INSTALLATION R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 40 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 41: Installation Requirements

    Installation Requirements 2. INSTALLATION 2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS 2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F) Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight) Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more Do not let the machine get exposed to the following: 1) Cool air from an air conditioner 2) Heat from a heater...

  • Page 42: Machine Level

    Installation Requirements 2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") 2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS  This machine, which uses high voltage power sources, can generate ozone gas. High ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in a well-ventilated room.

  • Page 43: Machine Dimensions

    Installation Requirements 2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS [A]: 670 mm (mainframe) + 260 mm (PFU) + 135 mm (ARDF) [B]: 580 mm [C]: 670 mm [D]: 1110 mm [E]: 657 mm [F]: 734 mm (Depth) (803 mm Max. with D630) 2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ...

  • Page 44: Copier Installation

    Copier Installation 2.2 COPIER INSTALLATION  Make sure that the image transfer belt is in its correct position (away from the PCDUs) before you move the machine. Otherwise, the image transfer belt and the black PCDU can be damaged. 2.2.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS ...

  • Page 45: Installation Flow Chart

    Copier Installation 2.2.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART This flow chart shows the best procedure for installation. You need the optional paper tray unit or the LCT if you want to install the finisher D588, D636 or D637) or 1200-sheet LCT (D631). The punch unit is for 2000-sheet booklet finisher (D637) and 3000-sheet finisher (D636).

  • Page 46: Installation Procedure

    Copier Installation 2.2.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Remove the tape from the development units before you turn the main switch on. The development units can be severely damaged if you do not remove the tape. Put the machine on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you install an optional paper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time.

  • Page 47: Protection Sheet (Only For Single Pass Adf Model)

    Copier Installation Protection Sheet (Only for single pass ADF model) Open the ADF. Release the lever [A] and open the white board ( Pull out the protection sheet [A] and remove it. Press the white board gently to close it. Close the ADF.

  • Page 48: Developer And Toner Bottles

    Copier Installation Developer and Toner Bottles Open the front door [A]. Remove the stopper [B] ( x 1).  This stopper locks the drum positioning plate lever. Release the image transfer unit lock lever [C], and turn the drum positioning plate lever [D] counterclockwise.

  • Page 49: Paper Trays

    Copier Installation 10. Install each toner bottle [G] in the machine.  The toner bottles are unique for the D143/D144 models. The toner bottles for the previous models (D088/D089) cannot be used in the D143/D144 models. 11. Close the front door. Paper Trays Pull each paper tray out.

  • Page 50: Decals

    Copier Installation Decals Attach the correct paper tray number and size decals to the paper trays [A].  Paper tray number and size decals are also used for the optional paper tray or the optional LCT. Keep these decals for use with these optional units. Initialize the Developer Plug in the machine.

  • Page 51: Settings Relevant To The Service Contract

    Copier Installation Settings Relevant to the Service Contract Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service contract.  You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) in accordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).

  • Page 52: Sp Operation Sound On/Off Setting

    Copier Installation SP Operation Sound On/Off Setting To turn off the SP Operation Sound Enter the SP mode. On the top menu screen [A], hold down the "Clear" button until you hear a beep sound. This turns off the SP operation sound. No SP operation sound can be heard in all levels [B] (SPx, SPx-xxx and SPx-xxx-xxx) of the SP mode.

  • Page 53: Settings For @Remote Service

    Copier Installation Settings for @Remote Service  Prepare and check the following check points before you visit the customer site. For details, ask the @Remote key person. Check points before making @Remote settings The setting of SP5816-201 in the mainframe must be "0". Device ID2 (SP5811-003) must be correctly programmed.
  • Page 54 Copier Installation Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below Other error this. Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait. executing Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5816-205 only when it has been input at the Center GUI. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5816-206.
  • Page 55 Copier Installation SP5816-208 Error Codes Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround Obtain a Request Number Inquiry, registration attempted -12002 before attempting the without acquiring Request No. Inquiry or Registration. -12003 Attempted registration without Perform Confirmation execution of a confirmation and before attempting the no previous registration.
  • Page 56 Copier Installation Cause Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround -12010 Write a common certification after initializing Certification area is not the certification area, and initialized. then execute the confirmation request to the @Remote Center. -2385 Other error -2387 Not supported at the Service Center -2389 Database out of service -2390 Program out of service...

  • Page 57: Enabling Vm

    Copier Installation Enabling VM The following procedure basically should be done by a customer. Press the [User Tools] key on the operation panel. Touch the "Extended Feature Settings" button twice. Touch the "Java TM Platform" line under the Startup Setting tab. Touch the "Extended Feature Info"...

  • Page 58: Security Function Installation

    Copier Installation Security Function Installation The machine contains the Security function (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit) built into the controller board. If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption unit by selecting "Format All Data"...
  • Page 59 Copier Installation Data Overwrite Security  Before You Begin the Procedure 1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values. (1) Supervisor login password (2) Administrator login name (3) Administrator login password If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed before you do the installation procedure.
  • Page 60 Copier Installation This icon is lit when there is temporary data to be Dirty overwritten, and blinks during overwriting. This icon is lit when there is no temporary data to be Clear overwritten. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [1] shows. 10.
  • Page 61 Copier Installation Authentication Management] -> [Available Settings] "Available Settings" is not displayed until step 2 is done. If this setting is not selected, tell the customer that this setting must be selected before you can do the installation procedure. Installation Procedure: Turn on the main power switch, and then enter the SP mode.
  • Page 62 Copier Installation 6. Select the data to be carried over to the hard disk and not be reset. To carry all of the data over to the hard disk, select [All Data]. To carry over only the machine settings data, select [File System Data Only]. To reset all of the data, select [Format All Data].
  • Page 63 Copier Installation 8. Press [Exit]. 9. Press [Exit]. 10. Press the [User Tools/Counter] key.  After the step 11, turn to the below initial operation display. But, it is not be encrypted. 11. Turn off the power and the main power switch, and then turn the main power switch back. 12.
  • Page 64 Copier Installation 13. Initial display. Confirmation Encryption Setting 1. Press the [User tools/Counter] key. 2. Press the [System Settings]. 3. Press the [Administer Tools]. 4. Press the [Machine Data Encryption Settings]. 5. Please confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display. Print to encryption key Use the following procedure to print the key again if it has been lost or misplaced.
  • Page 65 Copier Installation Encryption key sample Encryption key is printed out as a sheet of paper like the sample shown above. Please instruct the customer to keep it in a safe place. 2-25 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 66: External Usb Keyboard (External Option)

    Copier Installation 2.2.4 EXTERNAL USB KEYBOARD (EXTERNAL OPTION) Customers can use an external USB keyboard when the software keyboard is shown on the operation panel, if an external USB keyboard is connected to the USB port at the side of the operation panel or the controller box USB port.

  • Page 67: Moving The Machine

    Copier Installation [General Features] [External Keyboard]. Press [OK] to set it. Turn the main power off and on. 2.2.5 MOVING THE MACHINE This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor to another floor. See the section "Transporting the Machine" if you have to pack the machine and move it a longer distance.

  • Page 68: Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580)

    Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580) 2.3 PAPER FEED UNIT INSTALLATION (D580) 2.3.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty Screw (M4x10) Screw with Spring Washer (M4 x 10) Securing Bracket D143/D144 2-28 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 69: Installation Procedure

    Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580) 2.3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.  The handles of the main machine for lifting must be inserted inside the machine and locked unless these handles are used for the installation or relocation of the main machine.
  • Page 70 Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580)  You need two or more persons to lift the copier.  Hold the handle and grips of the machine when you lift and move the machine. Attach a securing bracket [A] to each side of the paper tray unit, as shown ( x 1;...
  • Page 71 Paper Feed Unit Installation (D580) Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on each tray of the paper feed unit.  The paper tray number and size sheet is in the accessory box of the main machine. 10.

  • Page 72: Envelope Feeder Ef3020 (D638)

    Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638) 2.4 ENVELOPE FEEDER EF3020 (D638) 2.4.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Envelope feeder Paper size decal D143/D144 2-32 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 73: Installation Procedure

    Envelope Feeder EF3020 (D638) 2.4.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  This tray can be installed in tray 2 of the copier, or tray 3 or tray 4 of the paper feed unit (D580).  There is no automatic paper size detection in the envelope feeder (D638). Adjust the paper size for the tray where the envelope feeder is to be installed with User Tools.

  • Page 74: Lcit Pb3140 (D581)

    LCIT PB3140 (D581) 2.5 LCIT PB3140 (D581) 2.5.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty Screw - M4 x 10 Screw with Spring Washer-M4 x 10 Securing Bracket 2.5.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ...
  • Page 75 LCIT PB3140 (D581) Remove the strips of tape. Grasp the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine. Lift the copier and install it on the LCT [C].  The copier should be lifted by two persons or more.  Hold the handle [A] and grips [B] of the machine when you lift and move the machine.
  • Page 76 LCIT PB3140 (D581) Remove trays 1 and 2 of the machine. Fasten the spring washer screw [D]. Reinstall all trays. Attach the securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each; M4x10). Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] to the line [C] on the tray of the LCT.

  • Page 77: Sp Settings

    LCIT PB3140 (D581) 11. Connect the power cord [A] to the inlet of the main machine. 12. Secure the power cord with the clamp [B] on the main machine so that the power cord is never disconnected. SP Settings Connect the copier and turn the main machine on. Do SP5-181-010 to set automatic paper size detection for the LCT paper tray.

  • Page 78: Lct Installation (D631)

    1200 LCT Installation (D631) 2.6 1200 LCT INSTALLATION (D631) 2.6.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty Front Bracket Rear Bracket Stud Screw Joint Pin D143/D144 2-38 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 79: Installation Procedure

    1200 LCT Installation (D631) 2.6.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure.  The Paper Tray Unit (D580) or LCT 2000-sheet (D581) must be installed before installing this 1200-sheet LCT. Unpack the LCT and remove the tapes. Remove the stand covers [A].
  • Page 80 1200 LCT Installation (D631) Insert the joint pins [A]. Attach the front [B] and rear brackets [C]. ( x 2 each) Pull out the front and rear rails [A], and then hang them on each bracket [B]. Connect the LCT cable [C] to the main machine. 10.

  • Page 81: Side Fence Position Change

    1200 LCT Installation (D631) 2.6.3 SIDE FENCE POSITION CHANGE Open the right door of the LCT. Push the down switch to lower the tray bottom plate until it reaches its lowest position. Remove the front and rear side fences [A, B] ( x 1 each).

  • Page 82: Ardf Installation (D630)

    ARDF Installation (D630) 2.7 ARDF INSTALLATION (D630) 2.7.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty ARDF Attention Decal Sheet – Top Cover Stamp Knob Screw Stud Screw Platen Sheet D143/D144 2-42 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 83: Installation Procedure

    ARDF Installation (D630) 2.7.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. Remove all tapes and shipping retainers. Insert the two stud screws [A] on the top of the machine. Mount the ARDF [B] by aligning the screw keyholes [C] of the ARDF support plate over the stud screws.
  • Page 84 ARDF Installation (D630) Remove two screws [F] from the bottom of the ARDF. Remove all tapes on the ARDF. Place the platen sheet [G] on the exposure glass. 10. Align the rear left corner (of the platen sheet) with the corner [H] on the exposure glass. 11.
  • Page 85 ARDF Installation (D630) 13. Open the ARDF cover [I]. 14. Open the feed-in guide plate [J] and feed-out guide plate [K]. 15. Install the stamp [L] into the ARDF. 16. Close two guide plates [K] [J]. 17. Close the ARDF cover [I]. 18.

  • Page 86: 1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632)

    1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632) 2.8 1-BIN TRAY UNIT INSTALLATION (D632) 2.8.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty 1 Bin Tray Unit End-fence Tray Support Bar Screws (M3 x 16) Screws (M3 x 8) Harness Cover Tray...

  • Page 87: Installation Procedure

    1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632) 2.8.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. If the bridge unit (D634) or side tray (D635) has already been installed in the machine, remove it before installing 1 bin tray unit (D632). This will make it easier for you to do the following procedure.
  • Page 88 1-Bin Tray Unit Installation (D632) Install the tray [A] with the tray support bar in the machine ( x 2; M3 x 16). Connect the harness to the connector of the 1-bin tray unit ( x 1, x 1). Attach the harness cover [H] ( x 1;...

  • Page 89: Internal Shift Tray (D633)

    Internal Shift Tray (D633) 2.9 INTERNAL SHIFT TRAY (D633) 2.9.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q'ty For this model Shift Tray Unit Connector Cover Paper Guide - Small 2-49 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 90: Installation Procedure

    Internal Shift Tray (D633) 2.9.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure. Remove all tapes. Remove the inner tray [A]. Remove the connector cover [B] ( x 1). Install two small paper guides [C]. D143/D144 2-50 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 91 Internal Shift Tray (D633) Attach the connector cover [D] to the shift tray unit [E]. Install the shift tray unit [E] on the machine. Push down the left edge part [F] of the shift tray. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. Check the shift tray unit operation.

  • Page 92: Side Tray (D635)

    Side Tray (D635) 2.10 SIDE TRAY (D635) 2.10.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Side Tray Unit Sub Output Tray Main Output Tray Screw Knob screw Frame Cover Guide Holder bracket D143/D144 2-52 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 93: Installation Procedure

    Side Tray (D635) 2.10.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation procedure.  If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing the side tray (D635).
  • Page 94 Side Tray (D635) Attach the main output tray [A] and sub output tray [B] to the side tray unit. Install the side tray unit [A] in the machine. Open the side tray cover [A]. 10. Secure the side tray unit with the knob screw [B]. 11.
  • Page 95 Side Tray (D635)  Open the side tray cover [A] when installing the front right cover. Otherwise, it cannot be reinstalled. 13. Install the holder bracket [D] ( x 1) 14. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 15.

  • Page 96: Bridge Unit Installation (D634)

    Bridge Unit Installation (D634) 2.11 BRIDGE UNIT INSTALLATION (D634) 2.11.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Bridge Unit Frame Cover Knob screw Long Knob Screw Holder bracket Guide D143/D144 2-56 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 97: Installation Procedure

    Bridge Unit Installation (D634) 2.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.  If you will install the 1-bin tray (D632) on the machine, install the 1-bin tray first before installing the bridge unit (D634). This makes it easy to do the following procedure. ...
  • Page 98 Bridge Unit Installation (D634) Install the bridge unit [E] in the machine. Secure the bridge unit with the long knob screw [F] and knob screw [H]. Attach the frame cover [I]. 10. Reinstall the front right cover on the machine, and then close the right door of the machine. ...
  • Page 99 Bridge Unit Installation (D634)  Holder bracket [L] is used in the installation procedure of the finisher (D588, D636 or D637). Do not install it at this time. 12. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 13. Check the bridge unit operation. 14.

  • Page 100: Finisher Sr3090 (D588)

    Finisher SR3090 (D588) 2.12 FINISHER SR3090 (D588) 2.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty For this model Grounding Plate Rear Joint Bracket Not used Front Joint Bracket Rear Joint Bracket Copy Tray Screw - M3 x 8 Screw - M4 x 13...

  • Page 101: Installation Procedure

    Finisher SR3090 (D588) 2.12.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. The following options must be installed before you install this finisher:  Bridge Unit (D634) and either Paper Feed Unit (D580) or LCT (D581) Unpack the finisher and remove the tapes.
  • Page 102 Finisher SR3090 (D588) Install the grounding plate [A] on the finisher ( x 2; M3 x 8).  Use the screw removed in step 1 and the screw from the accessory box. Open the front door [B]. Then pull the locking lever [C]. Align the finisher on the joint brackets, and lock it in place by pushing the locking lever.

  • Page 103: 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637)

    2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) 2.13 2000/3000-SHEET (BOOKLET) FINISHER (D636/D637) 2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q'ty Rear joint bracket Front joint bracket Ground (earth) plate Tapping screws - M4 x14 Tapping screws - M3 x 8 Tapping screws - M3 x 6 Upper output tray...

  • Page 104: Installation Procedure

    2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) 2.13.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If this finisher is installed on this machine, the following options must be installed before installing this finisher.  Bridge Unit (D634) ...
  • Page 105 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) Pull out the jogger unit [A], and then remove all tapes and retainers. Attach the cushion [B] to the finisher.  Make sure that the cushion is placed within 0 to 1 mm from the edge of the cover. Install the ground plate [C] on the finisher ( x 2;...
  • Page 106 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) Attach the rear joint bracket [D] ( x 2; M4 x 14). Attach the front joint bracket [E] and the holder bracket [F] ( x 2; M4 x 14).  Holder bracket [F] must be placed outside the front joint bracket [E]. This bracket is provided with the Bridge Unit (D634).

  • Page 107: Support Tray Installation

    2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D636/D637) 13. Install the upper output tray [I] ( x 1; M3 x 8). 14. Only for D637, install the lower output tray [J]. 15. Turn on the main power switch of the machine. 16. Check the finisher operation. Support Tray Installation If a stacking problem occurs several times on the upper output tray [A], put the support tray [B] on the tray as shown.

  • Page 108: Component Check

    Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570) 2.14 PUNCH UNIT TYPE 3030 (D570) The Punch Unit D570 is installed in the 2000-Sheet Booklet (D637) Finisher/ 3000-Sheet Finisher (D636). 2.14.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list. Description Q’ty Punch-out Waste Unit...

  • Page 109: Installation Procedure

    Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570) 2.14.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the main machine power cord before starting the following procedure. If the 2000-sheet booklet/ 3000-sheet finisher has been installed, disconnect it and pull it away from the machine. Installation Procedure Remove all tapes and shipping retainers.
  • Page 110 Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570) Remove the shipping retainer [A] from the punch unit ( x 2). Move the punch unit [A] along its rails into the finisher. Make sure that the pin engages correctly at the front and rear. Connect the cables [B] of the finisher to the connectors (CN601 and CN602) on the punch unit board ( x 2,...
  • Page 111 Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570) Attach the slide drive unit [A] to the finisher and connect it to the punch unit ( x 2, x 1). Push in the slide drive unit at when you attach the screw Make sure that the punch unit moves freely and is not blocked by the screws. 10.
  • Page 112 Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570)  This is the 3-pin connector. 14. Connect "Wire harness: short-circuit" [A] to the CN110 connector. 15. At the front, use a pair of wire cutters to remove the part [A] of the cover. 16. Install the punch-waste transport unit [B] in the finisher. 17.
  • Page 113 Punch Unit Type 3030 (D570)  This is the 4-pin connector. 19. Connect the cable to connector [C] and attach the punch-waste transport unit ( x 1, x 1, x 1). 20. Set the hopper [A] in its holder. 21. Reassemble the finisher, and then install it on the main machine. 22.

  • Page 114: Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674)

    Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) 2.15 KEY COUNTER BRACKET TYPE H (A674) 2.15.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Hold the key counter plate nuts [A] on the inside of the key counter bracket [B] and insert the key counter holder [C]. Secure the key counter holder to the bracket ( x 2).
  • Page 115 Key Counter Bracket Type H (A674) Connect the harness to the connector [F] inside the machine. Peel off double sided tape on the key counter bracket and attach the key counter to the scanner right cover [G]. Reassemble the machine. 2-75 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 116: Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829)

    Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829) 2.16 COPY DATA SECURITY UNIT TYPE F (B829) 2.16.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty For this model Bracket 1 Not used ICIB-3 Flexible cable: Long Not used Flexible cable: Short Not used Harness with bands Not used Harness Not used...

  • Page 117: Installation

    Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829) 2.16.2 INSTALLATION  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the rear cover [A] of the machine ( x 5). Remove the controller box right cover [B] ( x 8).

  • Page 118: User Tool Setting

    Copy Data Security Unit Type F (B829) Attach the ICIB-3 [D] (copy data security board) to CN 187 [C] on the BCU ( x 1, x 2). Reassemble the machine. User Tool Setting Plug in and turn on the main power switch. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings >...

  • Page 119: Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870)

    Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) 2.17 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE A (B870) 2.17.1 COMPONENTS CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Key Counter Interface Board Stud Stay Wire Harness 2.17.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Rear cover ( p.4-18)
  • Page 120 Optional Counter Interface Unit Type A (B870) Close the IOB bracket and connect the other terminal to CN215 [B] on the IOB. Cut off the part [C] of the rear cover. Clamp the harness from the counter device with the clamp [D] and put it as shown by the blue arrow ( x 1).

  • Page 121: Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593)

    Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593) 2.18 CARD READER BRACKET TYPE C3352 (D593) 2.18.1 COMPONENT CHECK Check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the following list. Description Q’ty Upper Tray Lower Tray Tray Bracket Screw: M3 x 8 Screw: M3 x 14* Screw: M3 x 25 Tapping Screw: M3 x 10...
  • Page 122 Card Reader Bracket Type C3352 (D593) 2.18.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Remove the screw [A] on the scanner right cover. Attach the tray bracket [B] to the scanner right cover ( [C] x 2: M3x10, [D] x 1: M3x25).  For this model, use the screw holes marked "1" on the table bracket. Attach the lower tray [A] to the tray bracket ( x 2: M3x8).

  • Page 123: Installation Procedure

    Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) 2.19 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER (SCANNER)  This option is provided as a service part. 2.19.1 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE Remove the ARDF or platen cover ( p.2-42) Remove the rear cover ( p.4-18). Remove the ARDF exposure glass and exposure glass with left scale ( p.4-26).
  • Page 124 Anti-Condensation Heater (Scanner) Route the heater relay cable [E] as shown ( x 3). 10. Connect the heater cable [F] to the heater relay cable ( x 1). 11. Reassemble the machine. D143/D144 2-84 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 125: Anti-Condensation Heater Type A

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A 2.20 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER TYPE A  This option is provided as a service part. 2.20.1 COMPONENT CHECK Description Q’ty Tray heater On-standby decal 1 (-90) or 2 (-91) Harness 2 (For D387)* Harness 1 (For D537/D538) Screw M4 x 10 Installation procedure *1: This harness is not used in this machine.

  • Page 126: Installation Procedure

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A 2.20.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE  Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.  Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.  Check that any harnesses are not damaged nor pinched after installation. For installing the tray heater in the main machine Remove trays 1 and 2 from the machine.

  • Page 127: For Installing The Tray Heater In D537

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A For installing the tray heater in D537 Rear cover [A] ( x 6) Pull out the two trays in the optional paper feed unit. Install the tray heater [B] in the optional paper feed unit ( x 1).
  • Page 128 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Remove the two securing brackets [C] ( x 1 each), and then the rear cover [D] of the optional paper feed unit ( x 2). Remove the harness cover bracket [E] ( x 1). Pull out tray 2 from the mainframe. Replace the shoulder screw [F] with the washer screw [G], using securing bracket [H] ( Connect the harness [I] to the connector [J] of the tray heater.

  • Page 129: For Installing The Tray Heater In D538

    Anti-Condensation Heater Type A For Installing the Tray Heater in D538 Remove the rear cover of the mainframe ( step 1 in "For Installing the Tray Heater in D537"). Pull out the LCT drawer.  If the right tray comes out with the left tray, push the right tray into the LCT. Left tray [A] ( x 2) Remove the right tray [B] while pressing down the stopper [C].
  • Page 130 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A Install the tray heater [D] in the optional LCT ( x 1). Remove the two securing brackets [E] ( x 1 each), and the then rear cover [F] of the optional LCT ( x 2). Remove the harness cover bracket [G] ( x 1).
  • Page 131 Anti-Condensation Heater Type A 10. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [L] of the tray heater. 11. Route the harness [K] as shown and clamp it with four clamps ( x 4). 12. Connect the harness [K] to the connector [M] of the mainframe. 13.

  • Page 132: Controller Options

    Controller Options 2.21 CONTROLLER OPTIONS 2.21.1 OVERVIEW  Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards. This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications. After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (see "Check All Connections"...

  • Page 133: Sd Card Appli Move

    Controller Options 2.21.2 SD CARD APPLI MOVE Overview The service program "SD Card Appli Move" (SP5-873) lets you move application programs from one SD card to another SD card. If more than one application is required, the applications must be moved to one SD card with SP5873-1 (PostScript 3, Security Application, PictBridge, IPDS unit, etc.).

  • Page 134: Move Exec

    Controller Options Move Exec The menu "Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD card to another SD card.  Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card on the machine.

  • Page 135: Postscript3 Unit Type C5502

    Controller Options Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec." Follow the messages shown on the operation panel. Turn the main switch off. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 2 (lower). 10. Turn the main switch on. 11. Check that the application programs run normally. 12.

  • Page 136: Ipds Unit Type C5502

    Controller Options Attach the "Adobe PostScript 3" decal [A] to the front door. Plug in, and then turn on the machine. Move the PostScript 3 application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.

  • Page 137: File Format Converter Type E

    Controller Options 2.21.5 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE E  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the slot B cover [A] ( x 2). Install the file format converter [B] into slot B and then fasten it with screws. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.

  • Page 138: Ieee 1284 Interface Board Type A

    Controller Options 2.21.6 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE A Installation Procedure  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284).

  • Page 139: Ieee 802.11A/G G Interface Unit Type J/K

    Controller Options 2.21.7 IEEE 802.11A/G G INTERFACE UNIT TYPE J/K Installation Procedure  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at one time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, Bluetooth).

  • Page 140: Installing Various Hardware Combinations

    Controller Options  "ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna. Do not attach them at the wrong places. Attach the clamps as shown above. Wire the cables and clamp them ( x 7).  Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers. You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
  • Page 141 Controller Options Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. Region A (mainly Europe and Asia) Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11) In some countries, only the following channels are available: Range: 1-11 channels (default: 11) Region B (mainly North America) Range: 1-11, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11) ...

  • Page 142: Sp Mode And Up Mode Settings For Ieee 802.11 A/G G Wireless Lan

    Controller Options SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11 a/g g Wireless LAN The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11 a/g g. SP No. Name Function Sets the transmission speed transmission Auto, 54 Mbps, 48 Mbps, 36 Mbps, 24 Mbps, 5840-008 speed 18 Mbps, 12 Mbps, 9 Mbps, 6 Mbps,...

  • Page 143: Bluetooth Interface Unit Type D

    Controller Options 2.21.8 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE UNIT TYPE D  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE 802.11 a/g g (Wireless LAN), Bluetooth). ...

  • Page 144: Camera Direct Print Card Type J

    Controller Options 2.21.9 CAMERA DIRECT PRINT CARD TYPE J  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). Insert the SD card [C] (PictBridge) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] to the front of the machine.

  • Page 145: Sd Card For Netware Printing Type H

    Controller Options 2.21.10 SD CARD FOR NETWARE PRINTING TYPE H  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the SD-card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots ( x 1). Insert the SD card [C] (Netware Printing) in SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face [B] to the front of the machine.

  • Page 146: Browser Unit Type F

    Controller Options 2.21.11 BROWSER UNIT TYPE F Installation Procedure  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the slot cover [A] for SD cards ( x 1). Turn the SD-card label face [B] of the browser unit to the front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.

  • Page 147: Browser Icon Addition

    Controller Options 16. Touch the "Browser" line. 17. Press one of the hard keys, which you want to use for the Browser Unit. In default, this function is assigned to the "Other Functions" key (bottom key of function keys). 18. Touch "OK". 19.
  • Page 148 Controller Options Press [Browser]. Press a [Blank] to set a location for the browser icon. Press [Exit] to end the fax browser icon addition. D143/D144 2-108 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 149: Gigabit Ethernet Type B

    Controller Options 2.21.12 GIGABIT ETHERNET TYPE B  Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure. Remove the controller cover [A] ( x 3). Pull out the controller board [B] ( x 5). Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 150: Check All Connections

    Controller Options Attach the Gigabit Ethernet controller [A] into the slot [B] ( x 2). Install the Ethernet connector cover included in the Gigabit Ethernet board kit on the 100M bit LAN connector. Reassemble the machine. Check the operation of the Gigabit Ethernet 2.21.13 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS Plug in the power cord.

  • Page 151: Preventive Maintenance

    PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 152 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 153: Maintenance Tables

    Maintenance Tables 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE 3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES See "Appendices" for the following information:  Preventive Maintenance Items  Other Yield Parts D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 154: Pm Parts Settings

    PM Parts Settings 3.2 PM PARTS SETTINGS 3.2.1 BEFORE REMOVING THE OLD PM PARTS Enter the SP mode. Output the SMC logging data with SP5-990-004. Set the following SPs to "1" before you turn the power off. Then, the machine will reset the PM counters automatically.

  • Page 155: After Installing The New Pm Parts

    PM Parts Settings For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to reset PM counters.  PCDU  Development unit  Toner Collection Bottle (if full or near-full)  Fusing unit 3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS Turn on the main power switch.

  • Page 156: Preparation Before Operation Check

    PM Parts Settings 3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK Clean the exposure glasses (for DF and book scanning). Enter the user tools mode. Do the "Automatic Color Calibration(ACC)" for the copier mode & printer mode as follows:  Print the ACC test pattern (User Tools Maintenance Start).

  • Page 157: Replacement And Adjustment

    REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 158 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 159: Beforehand

    Beforehand 4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT 4.1 BEFOREHAND  Before installing options, please do the following:  If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list. ...

  • Page 160: Special Tools

    Special Tools 4.2 SPECIAL TOOLS Part Number Description Q'ty B645 5010 SD Card B645 6705 PCMCIA Card Adapter B645 6820 USB Reader/Writer VSSM9000 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 NOTE G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel * C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope A257 9300 Grease Barrierta –...

  • Page 161: Image Adjustment

    Image Adjustment 4.3 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT 4.3.1 SCANNING Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments.  Use S-2-1 test chart to do the following adjustments. Scanner sub-scan magnification A: Sub-scan magnification Put the test chart on the exposure glass.

  • Page 162: Scanner Leading Edge And Side-To-Side Registration

    Image Adjustment Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration A: Leading Edge Registration Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.

  • Page 163: Ardf

    Image Adjustment 4.3.2 ARDF ARDF side-to-side, leading edge registration and trailing edge A: Leading edge registration Use A3/DLT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations. Check the registration.

  • Page 164: Registration

    Image Adjustment 4.3.3 REGISTRATION Image Area A = C = 5.2 mm (0.2"), B = 2.0 mm Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range as shown below. Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed. Side to Side Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station.

  • Page 165: Adjustment Procedure

    Image Adjustment Adjustment Procedure Enter SP2-109-003. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.  Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some pages of the 1-dot trimming pattern for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edge and side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP mode.

  • Page 166: Erase Margin Adjustment

    Image Adjustment 4.3.4 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT  Adjust the erase margin C and D only if the registration (main scan and sub scan) cannot be adjusted within the standard values. Do the registration adjustment after adjusting the erase margin C and D, and then adjust the erase margin A and B. Enter SP2-109-003.

  • Page 167: Color Registration

    Image Adjustment 4.3.5 COLOR REGISTRATION Line Position Adjustment The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best color prints. Do the following if color registration shifts:  Do "Auto Color Registration" as follows to do the forced line position adjustment. First do SP2-111-3.

  • Page 168: Copy Mode

    Image Adjustment Copy Mode - KCMY Color Balance Adjustment - The adjustment uses only "Offset" values.  Never change "Option" values (default value is 0). Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale...
  • Page 169 Image Adjustment - Adjustment Procedure - Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust. Enter the SP mode. Select "System SP." Select SP4-918-009. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (see the table below). ...
  • Page 170 Image Adjustment Adjust the offset value so that the color balance of K Highlight (Low ID) black scale levels 3 through (C,M, and Y) 5 in the copy is seen as gray <on the full color (no C, M, or Y should be copy>...
  • Page 171 Image Adjustment - Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color - Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so ID max: (K, C, M, that the density of level 10 and Y) matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.
  • Page 172 Image Adjustment - Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color - Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 10 ID max: (K) matches that of level 10 on the C-4 chart.

  • Page 173: Printer Mode

    Image Adjustment Printer Mode There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):  1200 x 1200 photo mode  1200 x 1200 text mode  2400 x 600 photo mode  2400 x 600 text mode  1800 x 600 photo mode ...

  • Page 174: Exterior Covers

    Exterior Covers 4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS 4.4.1 FRONT DOOR Open the front door [A]. Remove the two pins [A], and then remove the front cover. D143/D144 4-16 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 175: Controller Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.2 CONTROLLER COVER Controller cover [A] ( x 3) 4.4.3 LEFT COVER Controller cover ( p.4-17) Left cover [A] ( x 6) 4-17 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 176: Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.4 REAR COVER Rear cover [A] ( x 6) D143/D144 4-18 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 177: Right Rear Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.5 RIGHT REAR COVER Rear cover ( p.4-18) Scanner right cover ( p.4-24) Right top cover [D] ( p.4-24) Open the right door [A]. Right rear cover [B] ( x 3) 4-19 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 178: Operation Panel

    Exterior Covers 4.4.6 OPERATION PANEL Open the right door. Front right cover [A] ( x 1) Turn the operation panel upright. Scanner front cover ( p.4-27) D143/D144 4-20 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 179 Exterior Covers Upper cover [A] ( x 1) Disconnect the connectors and the ground cable ( x 3, x 2, x 1). Return the operation panel to the flat position. 4-21 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 180 Exterior Covers Take off the under cover [A] (hook x 1) Turn the operation panel upright. 10. Operation panel ( x 4) D143/D144 4-22 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 181: Paper Exit Cover

    Exterior Covers 4.4.7 PAPER EXIT COVER Front right cover ( p.4-20) Paper exit cover [A] ( x 1, hook x 1) 4.4.8 INNER TRAY Image transfer belt unit ( Image Transfer Belt Unit) Paper exit cover ( p.4-23) Left cover ( p.4-17) Toner cartridge cover [A] ( x 2)

  • Page 182: Ozone Filter And Dust Filter

    Exterior Covers 4.4.9 OZONE FILTER AND DUST FILTER Ozone filters for the scanner unit Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2) Right top cover [B] ( x 1) Ozone filters [A] in the right top cover. D143/D144 4-24 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 183: Ozone Filter And Dust Filter For The Ac Controller

    Exterior Covers Ozone filter and dust filter for the AC controller AC controller board fan cover [A] (hook x 1) Dust filter [A] Ozone filter [B] 4-25 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 184: Scanner Unit

    Scanner Unit 4.5 SCANNER UNIT 4.5.1 EXPOSURE GLASS Glass cover [A] ( x 2) ARDF exposure glass [B] Rear scale [A] ( x 3) Exposure glass with left scale [B] D143/D144 4-26 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 185: Exposure Lamp

    Scanner Unit  Position the black or blue marker [A] at the front-left corner when you reattach the ARDF exposure glass. 4.5.2 EXPOSURE LAMP Exposure glass ( p.4-26) Upper cover ( p.4-20) Remove the under cover [A] (hook x 1) Scanner front cover ( x 2) 4-27...
  • Page 186 Scanner Unit Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the cutout [B] in the front frame. Disconnect the connector [A] and clamp. ( x 1, x 1) Remove the clamp bracket [B]. ( x 1) Remove the pulley [A]. D143/D144 4-28 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 187 Scanner Unit Remove the plastic bracket [A]. (hook x 1) 10. Hold down the snap [A], and then slide the exposure lamp [B] to the front side. 11. Pull out the exposure lamp from the cutout. 4-29 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 188: Scanner Motor

    Scanner Unit 4.5.3 SCANNER MOTOR Scanner left cover [A] ( x 3) Scanner rear cover [B] ( x 1) Scanner rear frame [A] ( x 8, x 3, x 1) Scanner motor bracket [A] ( x 1) Scanner motor [B] ( x 2, x 1, spring x 1, belt x 1) D143/D144...

  • Page 189: Sensor Board Unit (Sbu)

    Scanner Unit  After replacing the scanner motor, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual ( p.4-3 in the "Image Adjustment" section). 4.5.4 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU) Exposure glass ( p.4-26) Scanner right cover [A] ( x 2) SBU cover bracket [A] ( x 4)

  • Page 190: When Reassembling

    Scanner Unit Sensor board unit [A] ( x 4, x 2, ground cable x 1) When reassembling Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:  SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning".  SP4–010 (Sub Mag Reg.): See "Image Adjustment: Scanning". ...

  • Page 191: Original Length Sensors

    Scanner Unit 4.5.5 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS Exposure glass with left scale ( p.4-26) SBU cover bracket ( p.4-31) Original length sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2, x 2) Original length sensors [A] (hooks) 4-33 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 192: Exposure Lamp Stabilizer

    Scanner Unit 4.5.6 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30) Scanner rear frame ( p.4-30) Exposure lamp stabilizer [A] ( x 2, x 2) 4.5.7 SIO (SCANNER IN/OUT) BOARD Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30) Scanner rear frame ( p.4-30) SIO board with bracket [A] ( x 4, All D143/D144...

  • Page 193: Scanner Hp Sensor

    Scanner Unit 4.5.8 SCANNER HP SENSOR Scanner left cover and Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30) Exposure glass ( p.4-26) Move the 1st scanner carriage [A] to the right side. Remove the mylar [A] Remove the scanner HP sensor [B] ( x 1, three snaps) 4-35 D143/D144...

  • Page 194: Platen Cover Sensor

    Scanner Unit 4.5.9 PLATEN COVER SENSOR Scanner left cover and Scanner rear cover ( p.4-30) Platen cover sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4.5.10 FRONT SCANNER WIRE Operation panel with the scanner front cover ( p.4-20) Front frame ( p.4-27) To make reassembly easy, slide the 1st scanner carriage to the right.

  • Page 195: Reassembling The Front Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire Position the center ball [A] in the middle of the forked holder. Pass the right end (with the ball) [B] through the square hole. Pass the left end (with the ring) [C] through the notch. Wind the right end counterclockwise (shown from the machine’s front) five times.
  • Page 196 Scanner Unit Hook the right end onto the front scanner wire bracket [I]. The end should go via the front track of the right pulley [J] and the front track of the movable pulley [K].  Do not attach the scanner wire bracket with the screw at this time. Remove the tape from the drive pulley.

  • Page 197: Rear Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit  Make sure the 1st and 2nd carriages move smoothly after you remove the positioning pins. Do steps 8 through 13 again if they do not.  After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual ( p.4-3 in the "Image Adjustment"...

  • Page 198: Reassembling The Rear Scanner Wire

    Scanner Unit 10. Rear scanner wire and scanner drive pulley [E] ( x 1) Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the forked holder. Pass the end with the ball [A] through the right square hole from the front. Position the center ball [B] in the middle of the notch, as shown by the arrow.

  • Page 199: Touch Panel Position Adjustment

    Scanner Unit  After replacing the scanner wire, do the image adjustments in the following section of the manual ( p.4-3 in the "Image Adjustment" section). 4.5.12 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT  It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times: ...

  • Page 200: Laser Optics

    Laser Optics 4.6 LASER OPTICS  Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before beginning any of the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury. 4.6.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATION Caution decals are placed as shown below. ...

  • Page 201: Ld Safety Switch

    Laser Optics 4.6.2 LD SAFETY SWITCH A relay on the PSU ensures technician and user safety. It also prevents the laser beam from turning on during servicing. This relay turns off when the front cover, upper left cover, or right door is opened.

  • Page 202: Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics 4.6.3 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT  Before installing a new laser optics housing unit, remove the sponge padding and the tag from the new unit.  A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated in the manual).

  • Page 203: Before Removing The Old Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics Before removing the old laser optics housing unit Do the following settings before removing the laser optics housing unit. These are adjustments for skew adjustment motors in the laser optics housing unit. Plug in and turn on the main power switch of the copier. Enter the SP mode.

  • Page 204: Removing The Old Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics Removing the old laser optics housing unit Controller cover [A] ( x 3) Left cover [B] ( x 6) Left fan bracket [A] for the laser housing optics unit ( x 4, x 4) Remove the old laser optics housing unit [A] ( x 2, All x 3) D143/D144...

  • Page 205: Installing A New Laser Optics Housing Unit

    Laser Optics Installing a new Laser Optics Housing Unit  A new laser optics housing unit has a bracket to protect the LD units. When you install the new unit, do not remove the bracket until near the end of the installation procedure (the correct time is stated in the manual).
  • Page 206 Laser Optics Adjust the main scan magnification for K, M, C, Y.  Input the standard values [C] provided with a new laser optics housing unit for the main scan magnification adjustment with SP2-102-013, 014, 015, 016.  The values [C] are different for each laser optics housing unit. Adjust the main scan magnification only for black (K).

  • Page 207: Polygon Mirror Motor And Drive Board

    Laser Optics 4.6.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR AND DRIVE BOARD Laser optics housing unit [A] ( p.4-44) Polygon mirror motor cover [A] of the laser optics housing unit ( x 4) Polygon mirror motor holder [A] ( x 2) Polygon mirror motor [B] ( x 4, x 1) After installing the polygon mirror motor:...

  • Page 208: Airflow Fans

    Laser Optics displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-10 to -12. After you replace the motor, do the adjustments in the following section of the manual: Image Adjustment – Registration. 4.6.5 AIRFLOW FANS Controller cover ( p.4-17) Left cover ( p.4-17)

  • Page 209: Laser Optics Rear Right Thermistor

    Laser Optics 4.6.6 LASER OPTICS REAR RIGHT THERMISTOR Open the right door. Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Open the front door. All PCDUs ( p.4-53) Image transfer belt unit ( Image Transfer Belt Unit) Release the harness clamp [A] and remove the screw [B]. Open the controller box ( p.4-155).
  • Page 210 Laser Optics Pull out the laser optics rear right thermistor [A] gently from behind by pinching its harness ( x 2, x 1, x 1).  When reinstalling the laser optics rear right thermistor:  The thermistor harness is about 25 cm long. When routing the harness, use tweezers, and pay extra attention to avoid damaging the harness.

  • Page 211: Image Creation

    Image Creation 4.7 IMAGE CREATION 4.7.1 PCDU  Do not touch the OPC drum. Do not let metal objects touch the development sleeve. Open the front door. Lever lock [A] ( x 1) Turn the drum positioning plate lever [B] and the image transfer unit lock lever [C] counter-clockwise.

  • Page 212: Drum Unit And Development Unit

    Image Creation 4.7.2 DRUM UNIT AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT The new drum unit has a front cover and a front joint. When you attach the new drum unit to the development unit, remove a front cover and a front joint at first. And use them for reassembling the new drum unit and development unit.
  • Page 213 Image Creation  Do not touch the bearing [A] after removing the front cover. The bearing is properly applied with lubricant. Remove the bushing [A] of the development roller at the rear of the PCDU ( x 1).  Do not put too much weight on the PCDU. Otherwise, the plastic frame [B] of the development unit may be damaged.
  • Page 214 Image Creation  When the development unit is removed from the drum unit, clean the entrance mylar [C] with a vacuum. Rotate the development roller [A] five or six times in the counterclockwise direction.  This step removes developer that has stuck to the development roller, which would cause color unevenness.

  • Page 215: Developer

    Image Creation Developer Set SP 3902-xxx to "1". Black: 3902-005 Yellow: 3902-006 Cyan: 3902-007 Magenta: 3902-008 Turn the machine power off. Development unit ( p.4-54) Hopper cover [A] (4 hooks)  Release the three hooks first in the correct order (from ...

  • Page 216: Toner Collection Bottle

    Image Creation  Keep the developer off at both ends of the development unit enclosed in red lines in the diagram. Turn the machine power on. The machine initializes the developer and resets the PM counter for the developer. (For details of the developer initialization result, see "Developer Initialization Result"...

  • Page 217: Second Duct Fans

    Image Creation 4.7.4 SECOND DUCT FANS Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-155) Second duct [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 2) Split the second duct [A] (Hooks x 4, X 1). 4-59 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 218: When Reinstalling The Second Duct Fans

    Image Creation Second duct fans [A] [B] When reinstalling the second duct fans Make sure that the second duct fans are installed with these decals [C] facing to the front of the machine. D143/D144 4-60 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 219: Third Duct Fan

    Image Creation 4.7.5 THIRD DUCT FAN Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-155) Third duct [A] ( x 2,  x 1) Third duct fan [A] (3 hooks) When reinstalling the third duct fan Make sure that the third duct fan is installed with its decal facing to the upper side of the machine.

  • Page 220: Toner Pump Unit

    Image Creation 4.7.6 TONER PUMP UNIT There are four pump units inside the machine. This procedure describes the replacement procedure only for one unit. If you need to replace another unit, do the same as this procedure.  Put some sheets of paper on the floor before doing this procedure. Toner may fall on the floor.
  • Page 221 Image Creation  Avoid touching these spring terminals [B]. Release the toner supply tube [C]. Remove the toner pump unit [A] ( x 2)  Make sure that a sheet of paper is attached to the frame of the rear side. The picture on the left shows a sheet of paper that is correctly set, but the picture on the right shows a sheet of paper that is not correctly set.
  • Page 222 Image Creation Slowly remove the toner supply tube [A] from the toner pump unit by pulling the tube right and left. Turn up the openings of the toner pump unit and toner supply tube just after removing the tube.  If not, the toner may scatter away and fall down.

  • Page 223: When You Install The New Toner Pump Unit

    Image Creation 11. Keep the opening [A] of the toner supply tube up, and then clip the opening of the toner supply. When you install the new toner pump unit Before installing the new toner pump unit, mask the opening of the old toner pump unit with tape. Dispose of it following local rules.
  • Page 224 Image Creation Connect the harness [A] to the connector of the machine.  On the above picture, the magnified picture of the connector shows the easiest way to connect it. Clamp the harness [A] ( x 1 for YCM, x 2 for K). ...
  • Page 225 Image Creation  Be careful when you lift the edge of the holder, because the holder is easily broken. Insert the toner pump unit [A] into the rear frame of the machine ( x 2). 4-67 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 226: Toner End Sensor

    Image Creation 4.7.7 TONER END SENSOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Open the controller box ( p.4-155) Toner end sensor [A] ( x 1, 2 hooks each)  A toner end sensor is not installed in the entrance of the toner supply tube for black. D143/D144 4-68 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 227: Image Transfer

    Image Transfer 4.8 IMAGE TRANSFER 4.8.1 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT If you will install a new belt cleaning unit, then set SP 3902-015 to 1.  If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the belt cleaning unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.

  • Page 228: Image Transfer Belt Unit

    Image Transfer 4.8.2 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT UNIT Open the right door. Open the front door. Open the drum positioning plate. ( p.4-53) Turn the image transfer belt unit lock lever [A] counterclockwise. Image transfer belt cleaning unit ( p.4-69) Pull out the image transfer belt unit [B] halfway. Grasp the handles [A], and then pull out the image transfer belt unit fully.

  • Page 229: Image Transfer Belt

    Image Transfer 4.8.3 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT Image transfer belt cleaning unit ( p.4-69) Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-70) Turn the image transfer unit contact lever [A] counterclockwise (as seen from the rear). Gear [B] (hook x 1) Turn the gear cover [C] clockwise (as seen from the rear) ( x 1).
  • Page 230 Image Transfer Remove the two screws and then the rear holder bracket [A] (as seen from the rear). Remove the two screws and then the front holder bracket [A] (as seen from the front). 10. Put the front side of the image transfer belt unit on a corner of the table or a box as shown. D143/D144 4-72 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 231 Image Transfer 11. Pull the tension roller [A] as shown. 12. Image transfer belt [A] 4-73 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 232: When Reinstalling The Image Transfer Belt

    Image Transfer When reinstalling the image transfer belt  Clean all rollers with dry cloth before installing the image transfer belt.  There is a rim [A] at each edge of the transfer belt. The ends of all the rollers ([B] for example) in the transfer belt unit must be between the two rims.
  • Page 233 Image Transfer  Put "Lubricant Powder" (B132 9700) on the surface of the image transfer belt [A], while you turn the drive gear [B] at a constant speed, as shown. (The straight arrow in the picture shows belt movement direction.) Lubricant powder prevents the image transfer cleaning blade from turning up.

  • Page 234: Paper Transfer

    Paper Transfer 4.9 PAPER TRANSFER 4.9.1 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP 3902-016 to 1.  If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically, after you turn the power on again.

  • Page 235: Paper Transfer Unit

    Paper Transfer 4.9.2 PAPER TRANSFER UNIT If you will install a new paper transfer unit, then set SP3-902-016 to 1.  If you do this, then the machine will reset the PM counter for the paper transfer unit automatically, after you turn the power on again. Turn off the main power switch.
  • Page 236 Paper Transfer Pivot bracket [A] ( x 1) Paper transfer unit [B] ( x 1, 2 springs) D143/D144 4-78 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 237: Id Sensor Board

    Paper Transfer 4.9.3 ID SENSOR BOARD K PCDU ( p.4-53) Open the right door. Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-70) ID sensor unit [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1) ID sensor cover [A] ( x 4) ID sensor board [B] ( x 2)

  • Page 238: Cleaning For Id Sensors

    Paper Transfer Cleaning for ID sensors ID sensors require a cleaning procedure every EM. Do the following steps for ID sensor cleaning. K PCDU ( p.4-53) Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-70) Slide the ID sensor shutter [A] to the left side. Clean the ID sensors keeping the ID sensor shutter to the left.

  • Page 239: Temperature And Humidity Sensor

    Paper Transfer 4.9.4 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY SENSOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Temperature and humidity sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1) 4-81 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 240: Drive Unit

    Drive Unit 4.10 DRIVE UNIT The drawing above shows the drive unit layout. 1. Fusing/paper exit motor 7. Paper feed clutch – Tray 2 2. Development clutches 8. Paper feed motor 3. Image transfer belt contact motor 9. Registration motor 4.

  • Page 241: Gear Unit

    Drive Unit 4.10.1 GEAR UNIT All PCDU's ( p.4-53) Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-70) Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller box ( p.4-155) Toner sump cover [A] ( x 2) Third duct ( p.4-61) Left cover ( p.4-17) PSU bracket ( p.4-162) Remove the rear stay [A] ( x 3).
  • Page 242 Drive Unit 10. Remove ten clamps (blue arrows). 11. Release seven clamps and turn each harness aside. 12. Disconnect four connectors (red arrows). D143/D144 4-84 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 243 Drive Unit 13. Disconnect two connectors (red arrows) and put these harnesses inside the machine. 14. Disconnect each connector (red circles) from the drum/development drive motors ( x 1, x 1 each). 15. Disconnect each connector (blue circles) from the development clutches ( x 1 each).
  • Page 244 Drive Unit 18. Release four clamps (red circles) and turn the harnesses aside. 19. Disconnect five connectors (red circles) ( x 5). 20. Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3) 21. Pulley [A] (timing belt) D143/D144 4-86 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 245: When Installing The Drive Unit

    Drive Unit 22. Gear unit [A] ( x 8) When installing the drive unit Make sure that the bushing [A] is fully set in the frame of the gear unit before installing the timing belt and pulley to the shaft [B]. 4-87 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 246: Adjustment After Replacing The Gear Unit

    Drive Unit Adjustment after replacing the gear unit Do the following procedures after replacing the gear unit. Turn on the main power switch. Enter "System SP" in the SP mode. Do “Amplitude Control" with SP1-902-001. Check the result of the Amplitude Control with SP1-902-002. 0: Success, 2: Failure due to no sampling data, 3: Failure due to insufficient number of pattern detections When the result of this adjustment is "2"...

  • Page 247: Registration Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Ventilation duct ( p.4-162) PSU bracket ( p.4-162) Fusing power supply board fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1) Registration motor assembly [A] ( x 3, x 1) 4-89 D143/D144...

  • Page 248: Paper Feed Motor

    Drive Unit Registration motor ( x 2) 4.10.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Paper feed motor [A] ( x 1, x 2) D143/D144 4-90 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 249: Drum/Development Motors For M, C, And Y

    Drive Unit 4.10.4 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTORS FOR M, C, AND Y Rear cover ( p.4-18) PSU bracket ( p.4-162) Open the controller box ( p.4-155). Drum/Development motors (three motors, one each for MCY) [A] ( x 4, x 1 each) 4-91 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 250: Drum/Development Motor-K

    Drive Unit 4.10.5 DRUM/DEVELOPMENT MOTOR-K Rear cover ( p.4-18) PSU bracket ( p.4-162) Controller box ( p.4-155) Third duct [A] ( x 2, x 1) Drum/Development motor-K [B] ( x 4, x 1) 4.10.6 ITB DRIVE MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller box ( p.4-155)

  • Page 251: Fusing/Paper Exit Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.7 FUSING/PAPER EXIT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller box ( p.4-155) Fusing/paper exit motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) 4.10.8 IMAGE TRANSFER BELT CONTACT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller box ( p.4-155) Transfer belt contact motor [A] ( x 2, x 2) 4-93...

  • Page 252: Duplex Inverter Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.9 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR Open the right door. Right door cover ( p.4-140) Duplex door [A] (2 hooks) Duplex guide plate [B] ( x 3, 2 hooks) Duplex inverter motor bracket cover [A] ( x 2, x 2) Duplex inverter motor bracket [A] ( x 3, x 1,...

  • Page 253: Pressure Roller Contact Motor

    Drive Unit Gear [A] ( x 1, belt x 1) Duplex inverter motor [B] ( x 4) 4.10.10 PRESSURE ROLLER CONTACT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-155) Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1).

  • Page 254: Duplex/By-Pass Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.11 DUPLEX/BY-PASS MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-155). Pressure roller contact motor ( p.4-95) Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1, x 1) Duplex/by-pass motor bracket [A] ( x 2) D143/D144 4-96...

  • Page 255: Paper Transfer Contact Motor

    Drive Unit Duplex/by-pass motor [A] ( x 4, belt x 1) 4.10.12 PAPER TRANSFER CONTACT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Open the controller box ( p.4-155). Stay [A] ( x 4) Pressure roller contact motor ( p.4-95) Duplex/by-pass motor bracket ( p.4-96)
  • Page 256 Drive Unit Paper transfer contact motor [A] ( x 2) NOTE: The picture below shows how to use the screwdriver to remove the screws of the paper transfer contact motor. D143/D144 4-98 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 257: Toner Transport Motor

    Drive Unit 4.10.13 TONER TRANSPORT MOTOR Rear cover( p.4-18) Open the controller box ( p.4-155) Toner transport motor [A] ( x 3, x 1) 4-99 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 258: Toner Collection Unit

    Drive Unit 4.10.14 TONER COLLECTION UNIT Gear Unit ( p.4-83) Toner collection unit [A] ( x 6, x 1) D143/D144 4-100 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 259: Paper Feed Clutches

    Drive Unit 4.10.15 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES Rear cover ( p.4-18) PSU bracket ( p.4-162) Release five clamps, and then turn the harness [A] aside. Paper feed clutch 1 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1, x 1) Paper feed clutch 1 [A] 4-101 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 260 Drive Unit Paper feed clutch 2 bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) Paper feed clutch 2 [A] D143/D144 4-102 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 261: Development Clutch-Y

    Drive Unit 4.10.16 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH-Y Rear cover ( p.4-18) PSU bracket ( p.4-162) Open the controller box. ( p.4-155). Toner sump cover ( p.4-83) Drum/development motor-Y ( p.4-91) Disconnect the connector [A] ( x 1). Remove the pulley and bushing [A]. 4-103 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 262: Development Clutches For M And C

    Drive Unit Turn the development clutch unit [A] counter-clockwise and then pull it out ( x 1). Development clutch-Y [B] ( x 1) 4.10.17 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES FOR M AND C Rear cover ( p.4-18) PSU bracket ( p.4-162) Open the controller box ( p.4-155).

  • Page 263: Development Clutch-K

    Drive Unit 4.10.18 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH-K Rear cover ( p.4-18) PSU bracket ( p.4-162) Controller box ( p.4-155) Drum/development motor-K ( p.4-92) Turn the development clutch unit [A] counter-clockwise and then pull it out ( x 1). Development clutch-K [A] ( x 1) 4-105 D143/D144...

  • Page 264: Fusing

    Fusing 4.11 FUSING 4.11.1 FUSING UNIT PM PARTS In the fusing unit, there are some PM parts. Refer to the following list to check the PM parts. PM Parts Replacement Procedure Heating Sleeve belt unit p.4-115 Pressure roller p.4-118 4.11.2 FUSING UNIT ...
  • Page 265 Fusing Remove two transport brackets [A] if installed ( x 1 each). Release the lock levers [A]. Hold the fusing unit handles [B], and then pull out the fusing unit. 4-107 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 266: Fusing Exit Shutter Plate

    Fusing 4.11.3 FUSING EXIT SHUTTER PLATE Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Fusing exit shutter plate [A] ( x 2) D143/D144 4-108 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 267: Fusing Entrance Guide Plate

    Fusing 4.11.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Turn over the fusing unit. Fusing entrance guide plate [C] ( x 2 )  Screw [A] and screw [B] are different from each other. 4-109 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 268: Cleaning Requirement

    Fusing Cleaning Requirement The fusing entrance guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Clean the fusing entrance guide plate at the place shown above with a dry cloth, and then clean the fusing entrance guide plate again with a cloth moistened with alcohol. 4.11.5 FUSING EXIT GUIDE PLATE CLEANING PROCEDURE The fusing exit guide plate requires cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval.

  • Page 269: Fusing Unit Upper Cover

    Fusing 4.11.6 FUSING UNIT UPPER COVER Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Fusing exit shutter plate ( p.4-108) Right guide bracket [A] ( x 1) Springs [B] Remove the fusing unit upper cover [C] while pressing down the rollers [D] ( x 4). 4-111 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 270 Fusing  When reinstalling the fusing unit upper cover:  The shutter plate [A] should be closed whenever the fusing unit upper cover is reinstalled. Otherwise, the ends of the shutter plate [B] may be damaged and this will result in a problem when opening and closing the shutter. D143/D144 4-112 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 271: Fusing Unit Lower Cover

    Fusing 4.11.7 FUSING UNIT LOWER COVER Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Fusing unit upper cover ( p.4-111) Place the fusing unit upside down. Lift up the fusing unit lower cover [A] half way ( x 4). Disconnect two connectors [B], [C] and remove the wire harnesses from their harness guides x 2).
  • Page 272 Fusing Fusing unit lower cover [A] D143/D144 4-114 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 273: Heating Sleeve Belt Unit

    Fusing 4.11.8 HEATING SLEEVE BELT UNIT  After the PM counter for the heating roller has reached its PM life (300K pages), the machine stops the operation automatically. Replace the heating roller before the machine stops its operation (stop warning: 315K pages, stop: 330K pages). ...
  • Page 274 Fusing 1: Right side Remove two screws at the right side ( x 2). 1: Left side 10. Left bracket [A] ( x 2) D143/D144 4-116 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 275 Fusing 1: Left side 11. Remove gears [A], [B], [C] ( x 1, x 1, bearings x 2). 12. Remove two screws on the left side ( x 2). 13. Remove the heating sleeve belt unit while releasing 4 snapping points at the right and left side (See the photos of steps 9 and 11).

  • Page 276: Pressure Roller

    Fusing 4.11.9 PRESSURE ROLLER Heating sleeve belt unit ( p.4-115) Remove the pressure roller with bearings [A].  The surface of the pressure roller is fragile, so the pressure roller must be covered with a sheet of paper when it is placed on a table or floor. D143/D144 4-118 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 277: Stripper Plate

    Fusing  Do not wipe off the grease of the new fusing drive gear when replacing the fusing drive gear [A]. 4.11.10 STRIPPER PLATE Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Heating sleeve belt unit ( p.4-115) Pressure roller ( p.4-118) Pressure roller stripper plate [A] (springs x 2) 4-119 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 278: Cleaning Requirement

    Fusing Cleaning Requirement The stripper plates require cleaning maintenance every fusing unit maintenance interval. Clean the stripper plates with a dry cloth, and then clean the stripper plates again with a cloth moistened with alcohol at the points shown above. 4.11.11 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTORS Fusing unit ( p.4-106)

  • Page 279: Pressure Roller Thermostats

    Fusing 4.11.12 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMOSTATS Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Fusing unit upper cover ( p.4-111) Fusing unit lower cover ( p.4-113) Pressure roller thermostat (center) [A] and pressure roller thermostat (end) [B] ( x 2 each) 4-121 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 280: Nc Sensors

    Fusing 4.11.13 NC SENSORS Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Fusing unit upper cover ( p.4-111) Fusing unit lower cover ( p.4-113) NC sensor (center) [A] and NC sensor (end) [B] (Hooks x 2 each, x 1 each) D143/D144 4-122 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 281: Fusing Fan

    Fusing 4.11.14 FUSING FAN Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Fusing duct [A] ( x 1, x 1) Fusing fan [A] (hook x 5) When installing the fusing fan Make sure that the fusing fan is installed with its decal facing the right side of the machine. 4-123 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 282: Paper Exit Fan

    Fusing 4.11.15 PAPER EXIT FAN Open the right door. Front right cover ( p.4-20) Paper exit fan [A] ( x 1, hook x 3) When installing the paper exit fan  Make sure that the paper exit fan is installed with its decal facing the rear of the machine. D143/D144 4-124 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 283: Ac Controller Board Fan

    Fusing 4.11.16 AC CONTROLLER BOARD FAN  Rear cover ( p.4-18)  Right rear cover ( p.4-19)  AC controller fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)  AC controller fan [B] ( x 2) When installing the AC controller fan Make sure that the AC controller fan is installed with its decal facing the upper side of the machine.

  • Page 284: Fusing Entrance Thermopiles

    Fusing 4.11.17 FUSING ENTRANCE THERMOPILES  Open the right door.  Fusing unit ( p.4-106)  Fusing entrance thermopile brackets ( x 1 each)  Fusing entrance thermopiles ( x 1 each, x 1 each) When cleaning the lens of the thermopile Do this cleaning procedure after the fusing unit has completely cooled down.
  • Page 285 Fusing Clean with a cotton-swab dipped in alcohol. 4-127 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 286: Pressure Roller Hp Sensor

    Fusing 4.11.18 PRESSURE ROLLER HP SENSOR Open the right door. Fusing unit ( p.4-106) AC controller board ( p.4-167) AC controller board bracket ( p.4-168) Pressure roller HP sensor [A] ( x 1, x 1, hooks x 3) D143/D144 4-128 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 287: Qsu Fan

    Fusing 4.11.19 QSU FAN Open the right door. Front right cover ( p.4-20) Pull out trays 1 and 2, and the image transfer belt unit. Right front cover [A] and front inner cover [B] QSU fan bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1, x 1) QSU fan (...

  • Page 288: Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Motor

    Fusing 4.11.20 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE DRIVE MOTOR AC controller board ( p.4-167) Fusing shutter plate drive motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) Do not wipe off the grease of the gear [B] on the new motor [A] when replacing it. D143/D144 4-130 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 289: Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Home Position Sensor4-131

    Fusing 4.11.21 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE HOME POSITION SENSOR Open the right door. Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) Fusing shutter plate home position sensor [A] (Hooks x 4) 4-131 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 290: Fusing Unit Shutter Plate Drive Mechanism

    Fusing 4.11.22 FUSING UNIT SHUTTER PLATE DRIVE MECHANISM Open the right door. Fusing unit ( p.4-106) Fusing unit shutter plate home position sensor bracket ( p.4-131) Fusing unit shutter plate drive mechanism [A] ( x 4) If the shaft interferes with the movement of the screwdriver, the screw [B] should be removed at very last while pushing the shaft down slightly.
  • Page 291 Fusing Drive cams [A] ( x 3, [B] x 1) Drive gear [C] and drive shaft [D] (Bearing x 1, x 1) Drive belt [A] When reinstalling the fusing unit shutter plate drive mechanism: Make sure that the tension of the coil spring on the drive shaft is correct before reinstallation.

  • Page 292: Paper Feed

    Paper Feed 4.12 PAPER FEED 4.12.1 PAPER FEED UNIT Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Duplex unit ( p.4-148) Pull out tray 1 and tray 2. Paper guide plate [A] (tab x 2) Harness cover [A] ( x 1) Paper feed unit [A] ( x 2,...

  • Page 293: Pick-Up, Feed And Separation Rollers

    Paper Feed 4.12.2 PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLERS Tray 1 and Tray 2 Paper feed unit ( p.4-134) Roller holder [A] ( x 1) Pick-up roller [B] Feed roller [C] Separation roller [D] and torque limiter [E] ( x 1) 4.12.3 TRAY LIFT MOTOR Rear cover ( p.4-18)

  • Page 294: Vertical Transport, Paper Overflow, Paper End And Paper Feed Sensor

    Paper Feed 4.12.4 VERTICAL TRANSPORT, PAPER OVERFLOW, PAPER END AND PAPER FEED SENSOR Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Paper feed unit ( p.4-134) Paper overflow sensor [A] Paper end feeler [B] and paper end sensor [C] (hook, x 1 each) Vertical transport sensor bracket [D] ( x 1,...

  • Page 295: Registration Sensor

    Paper Feed 4.12.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR  Rear cover ( p.4-18)  Right rear cover ( p.4-19)  Paper guide plate 1 [A] and 2 [B] ( x 2 each)  Registration sensor [C] ( x 1, hook) 4-137 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 296: By-Pass Paper Size Sensor And By-Pass Paper Length

    Paper Feed 4.12.6 BY-PASS PAPER SIZE SENSOR AND BY-PASS PAPER LENGTH SENSOR Open the by-pass tray [A]. Move the side fences to the center. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 4) By-pass paper size sensor [A] ( x 1). By-pass paper length sensor [B] ( x 1) D143/D144 4-138...

  • Page 297: When Reinstalling The By-Pass Paper Size Sensor

    Paper Feed When reinstalling the by-pass paper size sensor Adjust the projection [A] of the left side fence bar (it must be centered). Install the by-pass paper size detection switch so that the hole [B] in this switch faces the projection [C] of the left side fence bar.

  • Page 298: By-Pass Bottom Tray

    Paper Feed 4.12.7 BY-PASS BOTTOM TRAY Open the right door. By-pass tray cover ( p.4-138) Open the duplex door [A]. Right door cover [B] ( x 4) Right door rear cover [A] ( x 3) D143/D144 4-140 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 299 Paper Feed Remove the screw at the front side ( x 1). Remove the cover [A] (2 hooks). Remove the screw at the rear side. Release the front [A] and rear [B] arms ( x 1 each). 4-141 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 300: By-Pass Paper End Sensor

    Paper Feed 10. By-pass bottom tray [A] 4.12.8 BY-PASS PAPER END SENSOR  Right door cover ( p.4-140)  By-pass feed unit cover [A] ( x 2).  By-pass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1, hook) D143/D144 4-142 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 301: By-Pass Pick-Up, Feed And Separation Roller, Torque

    Paper Feed 4.12.9 BY-PASS PICK-UP, FEED AND SEPARATION ROLLER, TORQUE LIMITER Right door cover ( p.4-140) By-pass pick-up roller [A] (hook) By-pass feed roller [A] ( x 1) By-pass feed unit cover ( p.4-142) By-pass separation roller [A] ( x 1) Torque limiter [B] 4-143 D143/D144...

  • Page 302: By-Pass Feed Clutch

    Paper Feed 4.12.10 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH Open the right door. Right door rear cover ( p.4-140) By-pass feed clutch holder [A] ( x 2) By-pass feed clutch [B] ( x 1, x 1) D143/D144 4-144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 303: Paper Exit Unit

    Paper Feed 4.12.11 PAPER EXIT UNIT Fusing Unit ( p.4-106) Front right cover ( p.4-20) Image transfer belt unit ( p.4-70) Inner Tray ( p.4-23) Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Fusing entrance thermopiles ( p.4-126) Fusing duct ( p.4-123) Open the controller box ( p.4-155).

  • Page 304: Fusing Exit, Paper Overflow, Junction Paper Jam And Paper Exit Sensor

    Paper Feed 4.12.12 FUSING EXIT, PAPER OVERFLOW, JUNCTION PAPER JAM AND PAPER EXIT SENSOR Paper exit unit ( p.4-134) Fusing exit sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) Remove the fusing exit sensor from the fusing exit sensor bracket ( x 1) Paper overflow sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
  • Page 305 Paper Feed Junction paper jam sensor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1) Remove the junction paper jam sensor from the junction paper jam sensor bracket (hook) Paper exit sensor bracket [B] ( x 1, x 1) Remove the paper exit sensor from the paper exit sensor bracket (hook) 4-147 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 306: Duplex Unit

    Duplex Unit 4.13 DUPLEX UNIT 4.13.1 DUPLEX UNIT Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Right door cover ( p.4-77) Close the right door [A]. Remove the spring [B]. Open the right door [A]. Release the front link [A] ( x 1).
  • Page 307 Duplex Unit Hold the right door, and then release the wire [A] ( x 1). Keep holding the right door before removing the right door completely. Otherwise, the right door can fall down and injure you. 10. Press the projection [B] to pull the right door shaft into the unit, and then remove the duplex unit [C] ( x 1, x 1,...

  • Page 308: Duplex Door Sensor

    Duplex Unit 4.13.2 DUPLEX DOOR SENSOR Right door cover ( p.4-77) Open the right door. Duplex door sensor [A] ( x 1, hook) 4.13.3 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR  Right door cover ( p.4-77)  Open the right door.  Duplex entrance guide [A] ( x1, stepped screw x 2) ...

  • Page 309: Duplex Exit Sensor

    Duplex Unit 4.13.4 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR  Paper transfer unit ( p.4-77)  Guide plate [A] (two hooks)  Duplex exit sensor [B] ( x 1, hook) 4-151 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 310: Electrical Components

    Electrical Components 4.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS  Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards. 4.14.1 BOARDS Controller Box closed FCU (Option) G3 Interface Unit (Option) High Voltage Supply Board (Behind the PSU [D] ) D143/D144 4-152...

  • Page 311: Behind The Iob, Fcu And G3 Interface Unit

    Electrical Components Behind the IOB, FCU and G3 Interface Unit Controller Board Controller Box Open ITB Power Supply Board 4-153 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 312: Controller Unit

    Electrical Components 4.14.2 CONTROLLER UNIT Controller cover ( p.4-17) Controller unit [A] ( x 5) D143/D144 4-154 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 313: Controller Box Right Cover

    Electrical Components 4.14.3 CONTROLLER BOX RIGHT COVER Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller box right cover [A] ( x 8) 4.14.4 CONTROLLER BOX When opening the controller box Rear cover ( p.4-18) Remove six screws (red circles). 4-155 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 314: When Removing The Controller Box

    Electrical Components Open the controller box [A]. When removing the controller box Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller cover ( p.4-17) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Controller box right cover ( p.4-155) Remove the controller box stay [A] ( x 4). D143/D144 4-156 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 315 Electrical Components IOB bracket [A] ( x 4, x All). Disconnect the scanner interface cable [A] (ground cable) Release all clamps on the controller box frame. Disconnect all connectors on the IPU and the BCU board [B]. 10. Disconnect the connector [C] at the outer controller box and at the inner controller box. 4-157 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 316 Electrical Components 11. Disconnect two grounding cables ( x 1, each) 12. Open [1] and lift up [2] the controller box [A], and then remove it ( x 4). D143/D144 4-158 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 317: Iob (In/Out Board)

    Electrical Components 4.14.5 IOB (IN/OUT BOARD) Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller box right cover ( p.4-155) IOB [A] ( x 6, All 4-159 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 318 Electrical Components 4.14.6 IPU Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller box right cover ( p.4-155) IOB bracket ( p.4-155) IPU [A] ( x 5, x All) D143/D144 4-160 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 319: Bcu

    Electrical Components 4.14.7 BCU Rear cover ( p.4-18) Controller box right cover ( p.4-155) IOB bracket ( p.4-155) BCU [A] ( x 4, x All) Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the BCU. Insert the NVRAM in the NVRAM slot with the "half-moon"...

  • Page 320: Psu

    Electrical Components Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can damage NVRAM data. Make sure that the DIP-switch settings on the old BCU are the same for the new BCU when. Do not change the DIP switches on the BCU in the field. Make sure the serial number is input in the machine for the NVRAM data, if not, SC 995-001 occurs.

  • Page 321: Psu Bracket

    Electrical Components  Shutdown board ( x 2) PSU bracket  Rear cover ( p.4-18)  Shutdown board with bracket ( p.4-162)  Ventilation duct [A] ( x 2)  PSU bracket [B] ( x 6, x All, x All) 4-163 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 322: Psu Board

    Electrical Components PSU board Rear cover ( p.4-18) Shutdown board with bracket ( p.4-162) Ventilation duct ( p.4-162) PSU board [A] ( x 11, x All, x All) PSU fans Rear cover ( p.4-18) Shutdown board with bracket ( p.4-162) D143/D144 4-164 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 323: Itb Power Supply Board

    Electrical Components PSU fan bracket [A] ( x 6, x 2) PSU fans ( x 2, each) 4.14.9 ITB POWER SUPPLY BOARD Rear cover ( p.4-18) Open the controller box ( p.4-155) ITB power supply board [A] ( x 5, x 6) 4-165 D143/D144...

  • Page 324: High Voltage Supply Board

    Electrical Components 4.14.10 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD Rear cover ( p.4-18) PSU bracket ( p.4-163) High voltage supply board [A] ( x 8, x All, x 2) 4.14.11 HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD BRACKET  Rear cover ( p.4-18)  PSU bracket ( p.4-163) ...

  • Page 325: Ac Controller Board

    Electrical Components 4.14.12 AC CONTROLLER BOARD Rear cover ( p.4-18) Right rear cover ( p.4-19) Fusing duct ( p.4-123) AC controller board [A] ( x 7, x 5) 4-167 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 326: Ac Controller Board Bracket

    Electrical Components 4.14.13 AC CONTROLLER BOARD BRACKET  AC controller board ( p.4-167)  AC controller board bracket [A] ( x 3) D143/D144 4-168 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 327: Controller Board

    Electrical Components 4.14.14 CONTROLLER BOARD  Controller unit ( p.4-154)  Controller board [A] ( x 7, x 3)  Interface rails [A], NV-RAM [B], RAM-DIMM [C] 4-169 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 328: When Installing The New Controller Board

    Electrical Components When installing the new controller board Remove the NVRAM from the old controller board. Then install it on the new controller board after you replace the controller board. Replace the NVRAM if the NVRAM on the old controller board is defective.

  • Page 329: Hdd

    Electrical Components 4.14.16 HDD  Controller unit ( p.4-154)  Remove the HDD [A] with the bracket ( x 4, x 2).  Remove the HDD from the bracket [A] ( x 4). 4-171 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 330: When Installing A New Hdd Unit

    Electrical Components When installing a new HDD unit  Turn the main power switch on. The disk is automatically formatted.  Install the stamp data using "SP5853".  Switch the machine off and on to enable the fixed stamps for use. D143/D144 4-172 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 331: Toner Bottle Detection Board

    Electrical Components 4.14.17 TONER BOTTLE DETECTION BOARD Open the controller box ( p.4-155) Remove the grounding plate [A] completely ( x 3). Move the harnesses [C] downward to prevent the board from catching on them. Pull out the toner bottle detection board [B] gently and horizontally ( x 1, x 4) ...

  • Page 332: Nvram Replacement Procedure

    Electrical Components 4.14.18 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE This machine has two types of NVRAM. One is on the BCU ( p.4-161); the other is on the controller board ( p.4-169). NVRAM on the BCU Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine.

  • Page 333: Nvram On The Controller Board

    Electrical Components NVRAM on the controller board Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the machine. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001. (SP5-990-001) Turn off the main switch. Insert a blank SD card into slot #2, and then turn on the main switch. Upload the NVRAM data to the blank SD card using SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload).

  • Page 334: Tube Cooling Fan (1St Duct Fan)

    Electrical Components  If the message “SD card for restoration is required.” appears after the NVRAM replacement, the encryption key should be restored. See “Encryption Key Restoration for NVRAM” for the restoration procedure. ( p.6-123) 4.14.19 TUBE COOLING FAN (1ST DUCT FAN) Rear cover ( p.4-18) Tube cooling fan bracket [A] (...

  • Page 335: Single Pass Adf (Single Pass Adf Model Only)

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15 SINGLE PASS ADF (SINGLE PASS ADF MODEL ONLY) 4.15.1 SINGLE PASS ADF  Rear cover ( p.4-18)  Controller box right cover ( p.4-155)  Disconnect the ADF I/F cable [A]. ...

  • Page 336: Adf Covers

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.2 ADF COVERS ADF Front Cover Open the feed cover [A]. Remove two screws [A] on the front cover. Release two tabs [A] at the top of the ADF front cover and two tabs [B] at the bottom of the ADF front cover.

  • Page 337: Adf Rear Cover

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) ADF Rear Cover Open the feed cover [A]. Lift the original tray [B]. ADF rear top cover [C] ( x 1) Remove two screws [A] on the ADF rear cover [C]. Open the ADF [A]. Bracket [B] ( x 1) 4-179...

  • Page 338: Original Feed Cover

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Release two tabs, and then remove the ADF rear cover [C]. Original Feed Cover ADF front cover ( p.4-178) ADF rear cover ( p.4-178) Release five clamps shown above. Disconnect two connectors [A] and remove the ground cable [B] ( x 1).

  • Page 339: Original Tray Unit

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.3 ORIGINAL TRAY UNIT ADF front cover ( p.4-178) ADF rear cover ( p.4-178) Original feed unit ( p.4-183) Slide the right front cover [A] in the direction indicated by the arrow and remove it ( x 1).
  • Page 340 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Release four clamps ( X 4). Disconnect three connectors ( x 3). D143/D144 4-182 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 341: Original Feed Unit

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Lift up the original tray unit [A] and remove it ( x 2). 4.15.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT Open the original feed cover [A]. Remove the snap fitting [B]. Push the original feed unit slowly to the front side to disengage the shaft [C] on the rear side, and then lift it out.

  • Page 342: Original Feed Belt And Pick-Up Roller

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.5 ORIGINAL FEED BELT AND PICK-UP ROLLER Original feed unit ( p.4-183). Slide the bushing [A]. Original pick-up roller unit [B] Original pick-up roller [A] ( x 2, bushing x 2) Hold the original feed belt holder [A] by the left and right sides, then carefully pull it off the bushing.

  • Page 343: Original Separation Roller

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.6 ORIGINAL SEPARATION ROLLER Open the original feed cover. Original feed unit ( p.4-183) Original separation roller cover [A] Use the tip of a screwdriver to push up the cover. Original separation roller [B] ( x 1) 4-185 D143/D144...

  • Page 344: Original Registration Sensor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.7 ORIGINAL REGISTRATION SENSOR Open the original feed cover. Transport idle roller left unit [A] ( x 2) White guide plate [B] ( x 1) Original registration sensor [A] (hook, x 1) D143/D144 4-186 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 345: Adf Control Board

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.8 ADF CONTROL BOARD ADF rear cover ( p.4-178) ADF control board [A] ( x 4, all 4-187 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 346: Original Width, Interval, Original Separation And Skew Correction Sensors

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.9 ORIGINAL WIDTH, INTERVAL, ORIGINAL SEPARATION AND SKEW CORRECTION SENSORS Original Width Sensors Original feed cover ( p.4-178) Feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3) Original width sensor bracket [A] ( x 4) Original width sensors [A] (x 5, hooks, x 1 each)

  • Page 347: Original Separation And Skew Correction Sensors

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Original Separation and Skew Correction Sensors  Original feed cover ( p.4-178)  Original feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3)  Original separation sensor [A] (hooks, x 1)  Original skew correction sensor [B] (hooks, x 1) 4-189 D143/D144...

  • Page 348: Interval Sensor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Interval Sensor Original feed cover ( p.4-178) Original feed cover guide plate [A] ( x 3) Interval sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) D143/D144 4-190 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 349: Original Length Sensors

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.10 ORIGINAL LENGTH SENSORS Lift the original tray [A]. Lower cover [B] ( x 4) Original length sensor 1 – B5 [A] ( x 1) Original length sensor 2 – A4 [B] ( x 1) Original length sensor 3 –...

  • Page 350: Other Adf Sensors

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.12 OTHER ADF SENSORS Bottom plate HP Sensor Original feed unit ( p.4-183) ADF front cover ( p.4-178) Open the original side fence [A] ( x 1). Bottom plate HP sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks, x 1) D143/D144...

  • Page 351: Original Set Sensor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Original Set Sensor  Original feed unit ( p.4-183)  ADF front cover ( p.4-178)  Open the original side fence [A] ( x 1).  Bracket [A] ( x 1)  Original set sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) 4-193...

  • Page 352: Original Feed Cover Sensor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Original Feed Cover Sensor ADF rear cover ( p.4-178) Original feed cover sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) Bottom Plate Position Sensor  ADF rear cover ( p.4-178)  Bottom plate position sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks, x 1) D143/D144...

  • Page 353: Original Pick-Up Roller Hp Sensor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) Original Pick-Up Roller HP Sensor  ADF rear cover ( p.4-178)  Original pick-up roller HP sensor [A] (hooks, x 1) 4.15.13 BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MOTOR  ADF rear cover ( p.4-178) ...

  • Page 354: Original Transport Motor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.14 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT MOTOR ADF rear cover ( p.4-178) Original tray unit ( p.4-181) Harness guide [A] ( x 7, x 2, x 2) Disconnect the connector [A] and remove the timing belt [B] and spring [C]. Original transport motor bracket [A] ( x 2) Original transport motor [B] (...

  • Page 355: Original Feed Motor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.15 ORIGINAL FEED MOTOR  ADF rear cover ( p.4-178)  Harness guide ( p.4-196)  Remove the bracket [A] ( x 1, x 1).  Release the harness [A] ( x 1). 4-197 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 356 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only)  Release the harness [A] of the original pick-up roller motor ( x 1).  Disconnect the connector [A] and remove the timing belt [B] and spring [C] ( x 1, x 1, timing belt x 1).
  • Page 357 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only)  Original feed motor bracket [A] ( x 2).  Original feed motor [A] ( x 2) 4-199 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 358: Original Pick-Up Roller Motor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.16 ORIGINAL PICK-UP ROLLER MOTOR  ADF rear cover ( p.4-178)  Harness guide ( p.4-196)  Original pick-up roller motor [A] ( x 2, x 1) 4.15.17 ORIGINAL EXIT MOTOR  ADF rear cover ( p.4-178) ...
  • Page 359 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only)  Original exit motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)  Original exit motor [B] ( x 2) 4-201 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 360: Cis Unit

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.18 CIS UNIT  Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before performing this procedure.  ADF front cover ( p.4-178)  ADF rear cover ( p.4-178)  Original feed unit ( p.4-183) ...
  • Page 361 Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only)  Open the ADF [A].  Release the lever [B] and open the white board [C].  Insert a sheet of paper [A] between the exposure glass surface and the white roller, to protect the white roller.

  • Page 362: When Reinstalling The Cis Unit

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only)  CIS unit [A] ( x 2) Pull out the CIS unit carefully to avoid scratching the glass and damaging the white roller. When reinstalling the CIS Unit Align the arm [A] of the CIS unit on the rail [B] of the ADF unit, and then push the CIS unit slowly. ...

  • Page 363: Original Exit Sensor

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.19 ORIGINAL EXIT SENSOR  CIS unit ( p.4-202)  Original exit sensor with the discharge bracket [A] (hook, x 1)  Original exit sensor [B] 4-205 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 364: Adf Fan

    Single Pass ADF (Single Pass ADF model only) 4.15.20 ADF FAN ADF rear cover ( p.4-178) Original feed motor ( p.4-197) ADF fan bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1) ADF fan [A] ( x 2) When reinstalling the ADF fan Make sure that the ADF fan is installed with the label on the ADF fan facing the right side.

  • Page 365: Using Dip Switches

    Using Dip Switches 4.16 USING DIP SWITCHES 4.16.1 CONTROLLER BOARD DIP SW No. Boot-up from Flash Boot-up from SD card Memory Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch 2 to 8 settings. 4.16.2 BCU BOARD DIP SW No. Factory Use Only: Do not change the switch 1 and 2 settings.
  • Page 366 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 367: System Maintenance

    SYSTEM MAINTENANCE R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 368 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 369: Service Program Mode

    Service Program Mode 5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE 5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE  Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to process the data.

  • Page 370: Types Of Sp Modes

    Service Program Mode 5.1.3 TYPES OF SP MODES  System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions  Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions  Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions  Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode.

  • Page 371: Switching Between Sp Mode And Copy Mode For Test Printing

    Service Program Mode Opens all SP groups and sublevels. Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display. Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen, Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number.

  • Page 372: Selecting The Program Number

    Service Program Mode Selecting the Program Number Program numbers have two or three levels.  Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.  Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you want to adjust.

  • Page 373: Exiting Service Mode

    Service Program Mode Exiting Service Mode Press the Exit key on the touch-panel. Service Mode Lock/Unlock At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.

  • Page 374: Remarks

    Service Program Mode 5.1.4 REMARKS Display on the Control Panel Screen The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full description is over 20 characters.

  • Page 375: Others

    Service Program Mode Others The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables. FA: Factory setting (Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.) DFU: Design/Factory Use only Do not touch these SP modes in the field.

  • Page 376: Main Sp Tables-1

    Main SP Tables-1 5.2 MAIN SP TABLES-1 5.2.1 SP1-XXX (FEED) [Leading Edge Registration] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color Mode), Paper Type Thin, Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 or Thick 3 1001 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration motor operation timing for each mode.
  • Page 377 Main SP Tables-1 021 By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 022 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 023 Duplex: Plain:1200 *ENG 024 Duplex: Middle Thick:1200 *ENG 025 Duplex: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 026 Tray: Thin *ENG 027 By-pass: Thin *ENG 028 Duplex: Thin *ENG 029 Tray: Thin: 1200 *ENG 030 By-pass: Thin: 1200 *ENG...
  • Page 378 Main SP Tables-1 [Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle Adjustment (Tray Location, Paper Type, Color mode), Paper Type Plain, Thick, Thick1 1003 Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paper feed timing. 002 Paper Tray1: Plain *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step] 003 Tray1: Middle Thick...
  • Page 379 Main SP Tables-1 029 By-pass: Thick 1:1200 *ENG 030 Duplex: Plain: 1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 031 Duplex: Middle Thick: 1200 *ENG 032 Duplex: Thick 1: 1200 *ENG [–9 to 5 / -2 / 1 mm/step] 1007 [By-Pass Size Detection] By-Pass Size Detection Display *ENG...
  • Page 380 Main SP Tables-1 [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the settings of the reload permit for warm temperature in color mode. 008 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Center *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] 009 Temp.:Delta:Warm:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] [0 to 200 / C3c: 40, C3d: 26 / 1 010 Temp.:Delta:Warm:Press *ENG...
  • Page 381 Main SP Tables-1 [0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1 019 Forced Reload Time:Cold:BW *ENG sec/step] [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the settings of the reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2. [0 to 200 / C3c: 10, C3d: 5 / 1 020 Temp.:Delta:Cold:BW2:Center *ENG deg/step]...
  • Page 382 Main SP Tables-1 [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the setting of the forced reload permit for cold temperature in BW mode 2. [0 to 100 / C3c: 14, C3d: 20 / 1 106 Forced Reload Time:Cold:BW2 *ENG sec/step] [Reload Permit Setting] Specifies the settings of the reload permit for low temperature.
  • Page 383 Main SP Tables-1 Temp.:Upper *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step] Delta:Center 004 Temp.:Upper Delta:End *ENG [0 to 200 / 30 / 1 deg/step] 005 Temp.:Lower Delta:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 100 / 1 deg/step] 006 Rotation Time *ENG [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 sec/step] Temp.:Lower...
  • Page 384 Main SP Tables-1 1105 [Print Target Temp] (Printing Mode, Roller Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex) Roller Type Center and Ends: Heating roller, Pressure Pressure roller Paper Type Plain, Thin, Thick, OHP, Middle Thick, Special, Postcard [100 to 180 / C3c: 153, C3d: 156 / 1 Plain1:FC:Center *ENG deg/step]...
  • Page 385 Main SP Tables-1 Plain2:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / C3c:120,C3d:139 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the pressure roller target temperature for the ready condition in BW printing. [100 to 180 / C3c: 148, C3d: 151 / 1 009 Thin:FC:Center *ENG deg/step] 010 Thin:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 386 Main SP Tables-1 027 Thick3:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 163 / 1 deg/step] 028 Thick3:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] [100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1 029 Special1:FC:Center *ENG deg/step] 030 Special1:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] [100 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1...
  • Page 387 Main SP Tables-1 Plain2:FC:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain2:FC:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain2:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 180 / 138 / 1 deg/step] Speed Plain2:BW:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed M-thick:FC:Center:Low *ENG...
  • Page 388 Main SP Tables-1 Special1:BW:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:FC:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:FC:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:BW:Center:Low *ENG [100 to 180 / 148 / 1 deg/step] Speed Special2:BW:Press:Low *ENG...
  • Page 389 Main SP Tables-1 Thin:BW:Press:Low *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] Speed 139 Thick4:FC:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step] 140 Thick4:FC:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step] 141 Thick4:BW:Center *ENG [100 to 180 / 168 / 1 deg/step] 142 Thick4:BW:Press *ENG [0 to 200 / 120 / 1 deg/step]...
  • Page 390 Main SP Tables-1 Low Power :Center *ENG [0 to 125 / 90 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode. Low Power:Press *ENG [0 to 125 / 60 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the temperature of the pressure roller for the low power mode. [0 to 180 / C3c: 158, C3d: 161 / 1 Print Ready:Center *ENG...
  • Page 391 Main SP Tables-1 1111 [Environment Correction:Fusing] Temp.: Threshold: Low *ENG [0 to 100 / 17 / 1 deg/step] Specifies the threshold temperature for low temperature. If the fusing temperature is 17°C or less, the machine executes the fusing mode for low temperature.
  • Page 392 Main SP Tables-1 1113 [Curl Correction] [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] Execute Pattern *ENG 0: Off, 1: On (No Decurl), 2: On Selects the curl correction type. Humidity:Threshold:M-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 1 / 1 %/step] Specifies the threshold between low and middle humidity.
  • Page 393 Main SP Tables-1 CPM:H-humid *ENG [0 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step] Specifies the CPM ratio of the decurl control against to the normal operation in high humidity. CPM:M-humid:No Decurl *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Specifies the CPM ratio against of the no decurl control to the normal operation in middle humidity.
  • Page 394 Main SP Tables-1 003 Low :1st CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Specifies the 1st CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition. 004 Low :2nd CPM *ENG [10 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step] Specifies the 2nd CPM down ration against the normal CPM in the low temperature condition.
  • Page 395 Main SP Tables-1 High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 190 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:A3:Press End Specifies the heating roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A3 paper size. High:1st CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 180 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:DLT:Press End Specifies the heating roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT paper size.
  • Page 396 Main SP Tables-1 High:2nd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 195 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:LT:Fuser End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT paper size. High:3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 200 / 1 deg/step] Temp.:LT:Fuser End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of LT paper size.
  • Page 397 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 205 / 1 deg/step] Temp .:A5:Press End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A5 paper size. High :3rd CPM Down *ENG [100 to 250 / 210 / 1 deg/step] Temp .:A5:Press End Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size.
  • Page 398 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A3 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 paper size. High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A3 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 paper size.
  • Page 399 Main SP Tables-1 High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B4 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 paper size. High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:LT Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT.
  • Page 400 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B5 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B5 paper size. High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B5 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 paper size.
  • Page 401 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:Down [0 to 10,000 / C3c: 40, C3d: 20 / 1 *ENG Time:A6 sec/step] Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A6 paper size. High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A6 Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A6 paper size.
  • Page 402 Main SP Tables-1 High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:DLT:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT. High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B4:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 paper size.
  • Page 403 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A4:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 paper size. High :3rd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:A4:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A4 paper size.
  • Page 404 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B6:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B6 paper size. High :2nd CPM:Down *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 10,000 / 1 sec/step] Time:B6:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B6 paper size.
  • Page 405 Main SP Tables-1 [CPM Down Setting] 1125 Specifies the settings for the CPM down mode. High :1st CPM:A3:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 Large paper size.
  • Page 406 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:DLT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT Large paper size. High :2nd CPM:DLT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Large paper size.
  • Page 407 Main SP Tables-1 High :3rd CPM:DLT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of DLT Small paper size. High :1st CPM:B4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 90, C3d: 75 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Large paper size.
  • Page 408 Main SP Tables-1 High :3rd CPM:B4:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B4 Small paper size. High :1st CPM:LT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Large paper size.
  • Page 409 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:A4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A4 Large paper size. High :2nd CPM:A4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 Large paper size.
  • Page 410 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:B5:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B5 Large paper size. High :3rd CPM:B5:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] Size:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of B5 Large paper size.
  • Page 411 Main SP Tables-1 High :3rd *ENG [0 to 100 / 30 / 1 %/step] CPM:A5:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 3rd CPM down of A5 paper size. High :1st *ENG [0 to 100 / C3c: 85, C3d: 65 / 1 %/step] CPM:B6:Normal Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B6 paper size.
  • Page 412 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:A3:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A3 Large paper size. High :1st CPM:A3:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of A3 Small paper size.
  • Page 413 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:DLT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of DLT Small paper size. High :1st CPM:B4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Large paper size.
  • Page 414 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:LT:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of LT Large paper size. High :1st CPM:LT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of LT Small paper size.
  • Page 415 Main SP Tables-1 High :2nd CPM:A4:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of A4 Small paper size. High :1st CPM:B5:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 Large paper size.
  • Page 416 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:B6:Middle *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B6 paper size. High :2nd *ENG [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step] CPM:B6:Middle Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 2nd CPM down of B6 paper size.
  • Page 417 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:DLT:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of DLT Small paper size. High :1st CPM:B4:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B4 Large paper size.
  • Page 418 Main SP Tables-1 High :1st CPM:B5:Large *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 Large paper size. High :1st CPM:B5:Small *ENG [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step] Size:Low Speed Specifies the pressure roller temperature for 1st CPM down of B5 Small paper size.
  • Page 419 Main SP Tables-1 Displays the temperature at the center of the pressure roller when 103 Press Roller:Ctr Det1 *ENG an SC was issued. [-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature at the end of the pressure roller when an 104 Press Roller:End Det1 *ENG SC was issued.
  • Page 420 Main SP Tables-1 Displays the temperature at the end of the heating roller when an 202 Htg Rolloer:End Det3 *ENG SC was issued. [-50 to 300 / - / 1 deg/step] Displays the temperature at the center of the pressure roller when 203 Press Roller:Ctr Det3 *ENG an SC was issued.
  • Page 421 Main SP Tables-1 Pressure Position2 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 660 / 10 msec/step] Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the pressure position 2. Pressure Position3 *ENG [0 to 10,000 / 2,130 / 10 msec/step] Specifies the rotation time of the pressure roller contact motor for the pressure position 3.
  • Page 422 Main SP Tables-1 110 Pressure:Envelope *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 151 Pressure:Plain1/2:Low Speed *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] Sets the default pressure position of the fusing unit for each paper type in low speed.
  • Page 423 Main SP Tables-1 Filler Edge Detection Counter [0 to 9,000,000 / - / 1 /step] Displays the detection time for the edge of the pressure roller actuator. 1152 [Fusing Nip Band Check] 001 Execute Executes the nip band measurement between heating roller and pressure roller. If the nip band width is not 8 mm, and fusing is not good, replace the pressure roller or install a new fusing unit.
  • Page 424 Main SP Tables-1 [Low Temp. Start Up] 1154 Specifies the threshold temperature at the low temperature start-up. Temp. : Threshold Value *ENG [-10 to 100 / 5 / 1/step] Temp. : Threshold Value *ENG [-10 to 100 / 15 / 1/step] 003 Temp.
  • Page 425 Main SP Tables-1 [A3/DLT Size Heater Control] 1156 Sets the A3/DLT size heater controls. [0 to 400 / C3c: 280(NA), 270(EU/AA), 001 Print Width :Lower Limit *ENG d: 280(NA), 270(EU/AA) / 1 mm/step] Feed Permit *ENG [0 to 200 / 5 / 1 deg/step] Temp.
  • Page 426 Main SP Tables-1 014 Duplex CW:Middle Thick:High *ENG 015 Duplex CW:Thick1:Low *ENG 016 Duplex CW:Thick1:Mid *ENG 017 Duplex CW:Thick2:Low *ENG 018 Duplex CW:Thick3:Low *ENG 019 Duplex CCW:Normal:High *ENG 020 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step] 021 Duplex CCW:Middle Thick:high *ENG 023 Duplex CCW:Thick1:Mid...
  • Page 427 Main SP Tables-1 041 Feed:Thick 2:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / –1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 042 Feed:Thick 3:Low *ENG 043 Bridge Motor:Low *ENG 044 Bridge Motor:Mid *ENG [–4 to 4 / 0 / 0.1 %/step] 045 Bridge Motor:High *ENG 060 KOpcDevMot:High *ENG 061 KOpcDevMot:Mid *ENG...
  • Page 428 Main SP Tables-1 080 Fusing:Thin:600 *ENG [–4 to 4 / -0.6 / 0.01 %/step] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1] Drum Adjust *ENG 0: Off, 1: On Enables or disables the drum amplitude adjustment. 101 MOpcDevMot:High *ENG C3c: [–10 to 10 / 0 / 1 step/step] 102 COpcDevMot:High *ENG C3d: [–8 to 8 / 0 / 1 step/step]...
  • Page 429 Main SP Tables-1 127 Long:Registration:Thick 2:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 128 Long:Registration:Thick 3:Low *ENG [–2 to 2 / -1.1 / 0.1 %/step] 129 Long:Fusing:Plain:High *ENG [–4 to 4 / 1.9 / 0.01 %/step] 130 Long:Fusing:Plain:Low *ENG [–4 to 4 / 2.1 / 0.01 %/step] 131 Long:Fusing:Middle Thick:High...
  • Page 430 Main SP Tables-1 [Fan Cooling Time Set] 1950 Adjust the rotation time for each fan motor after a job end. 002 Fusing Exit Fan *ENG 006 Main Suction Fan *ENG 007 Paper Exit Fan *ENG 008 PSU Fan *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] 009 QSU Heater Cooling Fan *ENG AC Control board Cooling...
  • Page 431 Main SP Tables-1 [Fan Control Off Mode Time Set] 1952 Specifies the time for fan control off mode. 001 - *ENG [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 min./step] [Extra Fan Control] 1953 Configures the settings of extra fan control. [0 or 1 / - / 1 /step] Extra Fan Cooling State *ENG...
  • Page 432 Main SP Tables-1 ON/OFF Setting *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step] Enables or disenables the control of extra fan execution control. 0: Disenable 1: Enable [Fan Control] 1955 Configures the settings of fan execution switching. Execution Temp. *ENG [20 to 70 / 34.6 / 0.1 /step] Threshold...
  • Page 433 Main SP Tables-1 Fan Cooling Time:IH *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] Power Supply Fan:Initial Fan Cooling Time:Second Duct *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] Fan:Initial Fan Cooling Time:Third *ENG [0 to 120 / 0 / 0.1 min./step] Duct Fan:Initial 5-65 D143/D144...

  • Page 434: Main Sp Tables-2

    Main SP Tables-2 5.3 MAIN SP TABLES-2 5.3.1 SP2-XXX (DRUM) [Charge DC Voltage] Charge Roller DC Voltage Adjustment (Paper Type, Process Speed, Color) 2005 Paper Type –> Plain, Thick 1, Thick 2 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&FINE: Low speed Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.
  • Page 435 Main SP Tables-2 014 PCU:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / -29 / 1 –V/step] 015 PCU:Thick 2&FINE *ENG [–100 to 100 / -28 / 1 –V/step] [–100 to 100 / C3c:25, C3d: 24 / 1 016 HVP:Plain *ENG –V/step] 017 HVP:Thick 1 *ENG [–100 to 100 / 20 / 1 –V/step]...
  • Page 436 Main SP Tables-2 2012 [Charge Output Control] Selects the AC voltage control type. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 001 AC Voltage *ENG 0: Process control 1: Manual control (AC voltages are decided with SP2006.) 2013 [Environmental Correction: PCU] Displays the environmental condition, which is measured in absolute humidity.
  • Page 437 Main SP Tables-2 Changes the humidity threshold Absolute Humidity: *ENG between MH and HH. Threshold 4 [0 to 100 / 22.0 / 0.01 g/m /step] Current Temp. FC: Displays the current temperature. *ENG Display [0 to 100 / - / 1 deg/step] Current Relative Humidity Displays the current relative humidity.
  • Page 438 Main SP Tables-2 [Color Registration Correction] FA These values are the parameters for the automatic line position adjustment and are adjusted at the factory. However, you must input a value for SP2101-001 2101 after replacing the laser optics housing unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit"...
  • Page 439 Main SP Tables-2 011 Duplex Trail. L Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 1 / 0.1 mm/step] 012 Duplex Trail. M Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.8 / 0.1 mm/step] 013 Duplex Trail. S Size:Thick *ENG [0 to 4 / 0.6 / 0.1 mm/step] 014 Duplex Left Edge:Thick *ENG [0 to 1.5 / 0.3 / 0.1 mm/step]...
  • Page 440 Main SP Tables-2 [Test Pattern] 2109 Generates the test pattern using "COPY Window" tab in the LCD. 003 Pattern Selection [0 to 23 / 0 / 1/step] 0 None 11. Independent Pattern (1dot) 1: Vertical Line (1dot) 12. Independent Pattern (2dot) 2: Vertical Line (2dot) 13.
  • Page 441 Main SP Tables-2 2111 [Forced Line Position Adj.] Executes the fine line position adjustment twice. 001 Mode a If this SP is not completed (NG is displayed), do SP2111-003 first and then try this SP again. Executes the fine line position adjustment once.
  • Page 442 Main SP Tables-2 2118 [Skew Adjustment] 001 Execute: M *ENG Changes the current skew adjustment values to the values specified with SP2117. 002 Execute: C *ENG These SPs must be used when a new laser optics housing unit is installed or when SC2.585 occurs.
  • Page 443 Main SP Tables-2 034 Area 7: Bk *ENG 035 Area 8: Bk *ENG 036 Area 9: Bk *ENG 037 Area 10: Bk *ENG Not used 038 Area 11: Bk *ENG 039 Area 12: Bk *ENG 079 Area 0: Ma *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step] 080 Area 1: Ma *ENG...
  • Page 444 Main SP Tables-2 137 Area 6: Cy *ENG 138 Area 7: Cy *ENG 139 Area 8: Cy *ENG 140 Area 9: Cy *ENG 141 Area 10: Cy *ENG Not used 142 Area 11: Cy *ENG 143 Area 12: Cy *ENG 183 Area 0: Ye *ENG [–255 to 255 / 0 / 1 sub-dot/step]...
  • Page 445 Main SP Tables-2 [Area Shad. Correct. Setting] FA Adjusts the area correction value for each LD power. The main scan is divided into 16 areas. However, the image areas are limited from area 1 to area 14. 2152 For BK and Magenta, area 1 is at the rear side of the machine (left side of the image) and area 14 is at the front side of the machine (right side of the image).
  • Page 446 Main SP Tables-2 This is for the synchronizing detection 033 Area 0: Ma *ENG board. [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step] 034 Area 1: Ma *ENG 035 Area 2: Ma *ENG 036 Area 3: Ma *ENG 037 Area 4: Ma *ENG 038 Area 5: Ma *ENG...
  • Page 447 Main SP Tables-2 069 Area 4: Cy *ENG 070 Area 5: Cy *ENG 071 Area 6: Cy *ENG 072 Area 7: Cy *ENG 073 Area 8: Cy *ENG 074 Area 9: Cy *ENG 075 Area 10: Cy *ENG 076 Area 11: Cy *ENG 077 Area 12: Cy *ENG...
  • Page 448 Main SP Tables-2 106 Area 9: Ye *ENG 107 Area 10: Ye *ENG 108 Area 11: Ye *ENG 109 Area 12: Ye *ENG 110 Area 13: Ye *ENG 111 Area 14: Ye *ENG This is out of the image area. 112 Area 15: Ye *ENG [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]...
  • Page 449 Main SP Tables-2 008 S. Scan Erro.: Left: M *ENG 009 S. Scan Erro.: Center: M *ENG 010 S. Scan Erro.: Right: M *ENG 011 M. Cor.: Dot: M *ENG [–512 to 511 / - / 1 dot/step] 012 M. Cor.: Subdot: M *ENG [–15 to 15 / - / 1 pulse/step] 013 Paper Int.
  • Page 450 Main SP Tables-2 031 Paper Int. Mag: Subdot: C *ENG 032 Mag.Cor. Subdot: C *ENG [–32768 to 32767 / - / 1 pulse/step] 033 M. Left Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG 034 M. Right Mag.: Subdot: C *ENG 035 S. Cor.: 600 Line: C *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / - / 1 line/step] 036 S.
  • Page 451 Main SP Tables-2 055 S. Cor.: 1200 Line: Y *ENG [–16384 to 16383 / - / 1 line/step] 056 S. Cor.: 1200 Sub: Y *ENG [–1 to 1 / - / 0.001 line/step] [Line Position Adj. Offset] 2182 (Color) M. Scan: Main scan, S. Scan: Sub-scan 001 M Magnification *ENG Adjusts the line position manually.
  • Page 452 Main SP Tables-2 017 M. Scan: High: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 018 M. Scan: Medium: Dot: Y *ENG [-512 to 511 / 0 / 1 dot/step] 019 M. Scan: Medium: Subdot: Y *ENG [-15 to 15 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] 020 M.
  • Page 453 Main SP Tables-2 [Main Scan Length Target Display] Displays/adjusts the target value for the main scan length correction of the line position adjustment. After replacing the laser optics housing unit, input the standard value for Bk 2185 provided with the new unit. For details, see "Laser Optics Housing Unit" in the "Replacement Adjustment"...
  • Page 454 Main SP Tables-2 Page: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for color printing mode during jobs. Page: Stand-By: BW *ENG [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 page/step] Adjusts the threshold of the line position adjustment for BW printing mode in stand-by mode.
  • Page 455 Main SP Tables-2 Time 2 *ENG [1 to 9999 / 600 / 1 minute/step] Adjust the time threshold for the line position adjustment (Mode a: adjustment twice). The timing for line position adjustment depends on the combinations of several conditions. Page: Power *ENG [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 page/step]...
  • Page 456 Main SP Tables-2 008 Number of Execution *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step] 009 Number of Failure *ENG [0 to 999999 / - / 1 times/step] 010 Error Result: M *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1 /step] 0: Not done 011 Error Result: C *ENG...
  • Page 457 Main SP Tables-2 003 Plain: C *ENG 004 Plain: Y *ENG 005 Thick 1: Bk *ENG 006 Thick 1: M *ENG 007 Thick 1: C *ENG 008 Thick 1: Y *ENG 009 Thick 2&FINE: Bk *ENG 010 Thick 2&FINE: M *ENG 011 Thick 2&FINE: C *ENG...
  • Page 458 Main SP Tables-2 007 Thick 1: C *ENG 008 Thick 1: Y *ENG 009 Thick 2&FINE:Bk *ENG 010 Thick 2&FINE:M *ENG 011 Thick 2&FINE:C *ENG 012 Thick 2&FINE:Y *ENG [Temperature/Humidity: Display] 2241 Displays the environment temperature and humidity. 001 Temperature [-50 to 450 / - / 0.1deg/step] 002 Relative Humidity [0 to 1000 / - / 0.1 %RH/step]...
  • Page 459 Main SP Tables-2 [Environmental Correction: Transfer] 2302 Environmental Correction: Image Transfer Belt Unit Current Environmental Displays the current environment condition. Display Sets the environment condition manually. [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Automatic environment control 1: LL (Low temperature/ Low humidity) 002 Forced Setting *ENG 2: ML (Middle temperature/ Low humidity)
  • Page 460 Main SP Tables-2 [Paper Size Correction] 2308 Adjusts the threshold value for the paper size correction. [0 to 350 / 297 / 1 mm/step] Threshold 1 ≤ paper: 001 Threshold 1 *ENG Paper is detected as "S1" size. [0 to 350 / 257 / 1 mm/step] Threshold 2 ≤...
  • Page 461 Main SP Tables-2 2326 [Transfer Roller CL: Bias] Transfer Roller Cleaning: Bias Adjustment Positive *ENG [0 to 2100 / 500 / 100 V /step] Adjusts the positive voltage of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper transfer roller. Negative *ENG [10 to 400 / 100 / 10 %/step] Adjusts the negative current of the paper transfer roller for cleaning the paper...
  • Page 462 Main SP Tables-2 [Common: FC: Bias] Image Transfer Belt: Full Color: Bias Adjustment 2357 Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed ITB unit: Plain: Bk *ENG [0 to 80 / C3c: 30, C3d: 37 / 1 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for plain paper.
  • Page 463 Main SP Tables-2 ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: *ENG [0 to 80 / 11 / 1 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Black in full color mode for Thick 2 and fine. ITB unit: Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 80 / 12 / 1 Adjusts the current for the image transfer belt for Magenta in full color mode for...
  • Page 464 Main SP Tables-2 010 ITB unit: Thick 1: C *ENG 011 ITB unit: Thick 1: Y *ENG 012 ITB unit: Thick 2: Bk *ENG [1 to 60 / 31 / 1 /step] 013 ITB unit: Thick 2: M *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step] 014 ITB unit: Thick 2: C *ENG [1 to 60 / 2 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 465 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Bias: BW] Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for plain paper in 2403 black-and-white mode. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG Side [0 to 250 / C3c: 30, C3d: 38 / 1 - A /step] Paper Transfer: Plain: *ENG...
  • Page 466 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Paper Size Correction] Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for 2411 each paper size. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed Paper Transfer: Plain : *ENG 1st Side: S1...
  • Page 467 Main SP Tables-2 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st *ENG Side: S3 Paper Transfer: 1200: *ENG [100 to 600 / 300 / 5%/step] 2nd Side: S3 [100 to 600 / 115 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm (Paper Side: S4 width) [100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 468 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Leading Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading 2421 edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these SP values.  The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2422.
  • Page 469 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2422 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st *ENG Side...
  • Page 470 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Trailing Edge Correction] Plain Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction coefficient to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2403 and SP2407 are multiplied by these 2423 SP values. ...
  • Page 471 Main SP Tables-2 [Plain: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2424 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 472 Main SP Tables-2 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side /step] 003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 11 / 1 - A /step] 004 Paper Transfer: 1200: 2nd Side [Thin: Bias: FC] 2457 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thin paper in full color mode. Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2&Fine: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side [0 to 250 / C3c:40,C3d:50 / 1 - A...
  • Page 473 Main SP Tables-2 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: [100 to 600 / 160 / 5%/step] *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side: (Paper width) 017 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5 *ENG [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step] 018 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5 [Thin: Leading Edge Correction] Thin Paper: Leading Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current at the paper leading...
  • Page 474 Main SP Tables-2 [Thin: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2472 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed, 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 475 Main SP Tables-2 007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step] 008 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side [Thin: Switch Timing: Trail. Edge] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2474 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
  • Page 476 Main SP Tables-2 Paper Transfer: Plain: FC: 2nd Side 007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step] 008 Separation DC: 1200: 2nd Side Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] Paper Transfer: 1200: BW: 2nd Side Paper Transfer: 1200: FC: 1st...
  • Page 477 Main SP Tables-2 2484 [Glossy: Paper Size Correction] 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S1 *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S2 *ENG [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S3 *ENG [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step] 013 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S4...
  • Page 478 Main SP Tables-2 2489 [Glossy: Environment Correction] 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step] 003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 1 / 1 /step] [Thick 1: Bias]...
  • Page 479 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Paper Size Correction] Adjusts the size correction coefficient for the paper transfer roller current for 2511 each paper size. SP2502 and SP2507 are multiplied by these SP values. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side: *ENG [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] S1 size >...
  • Page 480 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 115 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st *ENG 210 mm > S4 size > 148 mm Side: S4 (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 190 / 5%/step] Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd *ENG 210 mm >...
  • Page 481 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Switch Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2522 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed Paper Transfer: Plain 1: 1st *ENG Side...
  • Page 482 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 1: Sw Timing: Trail. Edge] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2524 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 483 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 2: Bias] 2551 Adjusts the DC voltage of the discharge plate for thick 2 paper. 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 4000 / 3500 / 10 –V/step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [Thick 2: Bias: BW] 2553 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick 2 paper in black-and-white mode.
  • Page 484 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 110 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S3 *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step] 006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S3 *ENG 275 mm >...
  • Page 485 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 2: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2572 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG...
  • Page 486 Main SP Tables-2 2580 [Thick 2 Environment Correction] 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: BW: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step] 004 Paper Transfer: BW: 2nd Side *ENG 005 Paper Transfer: FC: 1st Side...
  • Page 487 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step] 002 Paper Transfer: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 200 / 5%/step] 003 Paper Transfer: S3 *ENG 275 mm > S3 size > 210 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step] 004 Paper Transfer: S4 *ENG...
  • Page 488 Main SP Tables-2 [OHP: Trailing Edge Correction] Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing 2623 edge in each mode. SP2603 and SP2608 are multiplied by these SP values.  The paper trailing edge area can be adjusted with SP2624. 001 Paper Transfer *ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 5%/step]...
  • Page 489 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick3: Bias: BW] 2651 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 3 in black-and-white mode. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 - A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step] [Thick3: Bias: FC]...
  • Page 490 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 005 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step] 006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S1 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2...
  • Page 491 Main SP Tables-2 004 Separation DC: 2nd Side *ENG [Thick 3: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2655 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
  • Page 492 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 3: Trail. Edge Correction] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2657 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step]...
  • Page 493 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick4: Bias: BW] 2671 Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for thick paper 4 in black-and-white mode. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 10 / 1 - A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side *ENG [0 to 250 / 12 / 1 - A /step] [Thick4: Bias: FC]...
  • Page 494 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 260 / 5%/step] 006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S3 *ENG S1 size > 297 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 100 / 5%/step] 007 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S4 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 430 / 5%/step] 008 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S4...
  • Page 495 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 4: Sw Timing: Lead. Edge] Adjusts the bias/ voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/ discharge 2675 plate at the paper leading edge between the erase margin area and the image area. 001 Paper Transfer: 1st Side *ENG 002 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG...
  • Page 496 Main SP Tables-2 [Thick 4: Environment Correction] Thick 4 Paper: MM Environment Coefficient Adjustment 2680 Adjusts the environment coefficient for each mode. When the environment is detected as MM, SP2671 and SP2672 are multiplied by these SP values. 001 Separation DC: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 22 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: 2nd Side...
  • Page 497 Main SP Tables-2 [Special1: Bias: FC] Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 1 in full color 2757 mode. Plain: High speed, Fine: Low speed [0 to 250 / C3c: 40, C3d: 50 / 1 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG –...
  • Page 498 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step] 017 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 180 / 5%/step] 018 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S5 *ENG 148 mm > S5 size (Paper width) [Special 1: Leading Edge Correction] Special 1 Paper: Leading Edge Correction...
  • Page 499 Main SP Tables-2 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 2 mm/step] 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG 003 Paper Transfer: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 500 Main SP Tables-2 005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG 007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Side *ENG [Special 1: Environment Correction] 2780 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side...
  • Page 501 Main SP Tables-2 [Special2: Bias: BW] Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 2 in 2803 black-and-white mode. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / C3c: 30/ C3d: 38 / 1 - A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG...
  • Page 502 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] 006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S3 *ENG 275 mm >...
  • Page 503 Main SP Tables-2 Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2801 is multiplied by these SP values. 2821  The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2822. 005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG...
  • Page 504 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 2: Trail. Edge Correction] Special 2 Paper: Trailing Edge Correction Adjusts the correction to the paper transfer roller current for the paper trailing edge in each mode. SP2803 and SP2807 are multiplied by these SP values. 2823 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed ...
  • Page 505 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 2: Environment Correction] 2830 Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 26 / 1 /step] 002 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 32 / 1 /step] 003 Paper Transfer: Plain: BW: 1st Side *ENG [1 to 60 / 11 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 506 Main SP Tables-2 [Special 3: Bias: BW] Adjusts the current for the paper transfer roller for special paper 3 in 2852 black-and-white mode. Plain: High speed, 1200: Low speed 001 Paper Transfer: Plain: 1st Side *ENG [0 to 250 / C3c: 30/ C3d: 38 / 1 - A /step] 002 Paper Transfer: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG...
  • Page 507 Main SP Tables-2 [100 to 600 / 120 / 5%/step] 006 Paper Transfer: 2nd Side: S2 *ENG 297 mm > S2 size > 275 mm (Paper width) [100 to 600 / 140 / 5%/step] 009 Paper Transfer: 1st Side: S3 *ENG 275 mm >...
  • Page 508 Main SP Tables-2 Adjusts the correction to the discharge plate current at the paper leading edge in each mode. SP2851 is multiplied by these SP values. 2871  The paper leading edge area can be adjusted with SP2872. 005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG...
  • Page 509 Main SP Tables-2 005 Separation DC: Plain: 1st Side *ENG 006 Separation DC: Plain: 2nd Side *ENG 007 Separation DC: 1200: 1st Page *ENG [Special 3: Sw Timing: Trail. Edge] Adjusts the bias/voltage switch timing of the paper transfer roller/discharge 2874 plate at the paper trailing edge between the erase margin area and the image area.
  • Page 510 Main SP Tables-2 [Dev Rvs Time] Development Roller Reverse Time Specified the time of the development roller reverse rotation after the 2905 development unit has stopped. The reverse rotation of the development roller is used for removing dust from the development roller. 001 K *ENG 002 M...
  • Page 511 Main SP Tables-2 2920 [Trans Mot Control] 0: Encorder 1 :FG *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] Selects the speed control mode for the ITB. If SC443 occurs and machine does not recover, change this setting to "1". SC443-00 Count *ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 512 Main SP Tables-2 2971 T1 Non Image Area ON Timing [–300 to 260 / C3c: 10 / 10 msec/step] Standard Speed *ENG [–240 to 240 / C3d: 30 / 10 msec/step] Adjusts the timing for the non-image area bias of the image transfer roller. 002 Medium Speed *ENG [–400 to 290 / 0 / 10 msec/step]...
  • Page 513 Main SP Tables-2 2990 Print Duty Control [0 or 1 / - / 1 /step] 001 Duty Control State *ENG 0: No limit, 1: Limit Exec Interval: Duty *ENG [60 to 3600 / 300 / 10 min./step] Control 003 Duty Control Thresh *ENG [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Forced CPM Down...

  • Page 514: Sp3-Xxx (Process)

    Main SP Tables-3 5.4 MAIN SP TABLES-3 5.4.1 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) 3011 [Process Cont. Manual Execution] Executes the normal process control manually (potential control). 001 Normal Check the result with SP3-325-001 and 3-012-001 after executing this SP. Executes the toner density adjustment 002 Density Adjustment manually.
  • Page 515 Main SP Tables-3 [Process Cont. Check Result] Process Control Self-check Result Displays the result of the latest process control self-check. All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “Y C M K” 3012 e.g., 11 (Y) 99 (C) 11 (M) 11 (K): The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successful.
  • Page 516 Main SP Tables-3 [T Sensor Initial Set:Exe] 3014 Developer Initialization Result: Display [0 to 9999 / - / 1 /step ] Display: YCMK *ENG 1: Success, 2 to 9: Failure Displays the developer initialization result. See section "Developer Initialization Result" in the "Appendix: Process Control Error Conditions" section for details on the meaning of each code.
  • Page 517 Main SP Tables-3 3041 [Process Control Type] [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step ] Alphanumeric 0: FIXED (Use the fixed values for the Voltage Control *ENG charge DC bias and development DC bias set with SP2-005 and SP2-229.) 1: CONTROL Enables or disables potential control.
  • Page 518 Main SP Tables-3 3043 [TD Adjustment Mode] Repeat Number: Power ON *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at power on. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.)
  • Page 519 Main SP Tables-3 Repeat Number: ACC *ENG [0 to 9 / 3 / 1 time/step] Specifies the maximum number of repeats of the toner density adjustment at ACC. 0: Disabled, 1 to 3: Repeat number, 4: Repeat three times (No consumption mode) 5: Repeat three times (Toner is supplied only when the toner density is too low, and toner is consumed only when the toner density is too dark.) 6 to 9: Disabled...
  • Page 520 Main SP Tables-3 Consumption pattern: C *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step] Specifies the belt mark generating time for checking the cyan toner density when toner density is detected to be low at the toner density adjustment. Consumption pattern: Y *ENG [0 to 255 / 5 / 1 time/step]...
  • Page 521 Main SP Tables-3 Consumption Pat: LD: DUTY: C *ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step] Adjusts the LD duty for the toner consumption mode at the toner density adjustment. In toner consumption mode, toner is discharged when the detected development gamma values (SP3611-003) exceed the target values (SP3611-007) by more than the specified thresholds (SP3239-009).
  • Page 522 Main SP Tables-3 [Toner End Recovery] 3102 Adjusts the number of times toner supply is attempted for each color when the TD sensor continues to detect toner end during toner recovery. 001 Repeat: Bk *ENG 002 Repeat: M *ENG [1 to 20 / 5 / 1 time/step] 003 Repeat: C *ENG 004 Repeat: Y...
  • Page 523 Main SP Tables-3 [Vt Shift: Display/Set] 3211 Adjusts the Vt correction value for each line speed. Thick 1: 154 mm/sec, Thick 2&Fine: 77 mm/sec [0 to 5 / C3c: 0.18, C3d: 0.38 / 0.01 001 Thick 1 Shift: Bk *ENG V/step] [0 to 5 / C3c: 0.18, C3d: 0.36 / 0.01 002 Thick 1 Shift: M...
  • Page 524 Main SP Tables-3 [Vtcnt: Display/Set] 3221 Displays or adjusts the current Vtcnt value for each color. 001 Current: Bk *ENG 002 Current: M *ENG [0 to 5 / 3.86 / 0.01 V/step] 003 Current: C *ENG 004 Current: Y *ENG Displays or adjusts the Vtcnt value for each color at developer initialization.
  • Page 525 Main SP Tables-3 009-012 Displays and adjusts Vtref correction by pixel coverage for each color. DFU 009 Pixel Correction: Bk *ENG 010 Pixel Correction: M *ENG [-5 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step] 011 Pixel Correction: C *ENG 012 Pixel Correction: Y *ENG [Vtref Correction: Setting] 3239...
  • Page 526 Main SP Tables-3 Correction Coefficient 1: *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step] Correction Coefficient 1: *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step] Correction Coefficient 1: *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step] Correction Coefficient 1: *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.5 / 0.1/step] Correction Coefficient 2: *ENG...
  • Page 527 Main SP Tables-3 [LD Power Setting] 3242 Adjusts the coefficient for LD power control value at the process control. StdSpd:Coefficient: *ENG 002 StdSpd:Coefficient: M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 124 / 1 /step] 003 StdSpd:Coefficient: C *ENG 004 StdSpd:Coefficient: Y *ENG 005 StdSpd:Offset: Bk *ENG...
  • Page 528 Main SP Tables-3 021 LowSpd:offset:Bk *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 59 / 1 /step] 022 LowSpd:offset:M *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 45 / 1 /step] 023 LowSpd:offset:C *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 69 / 1 /step] 024 LowSpd:offset:Y *ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 65 / 1 /step] [Coverage] 3251 These (-001 to -016) are coefficients for SP3-222-009 to -012.
  • Page 529 Main SP Tables-3 Displays the average coverage of each color for the Vtref correction. 013-016 "Average L" is defined when the number of developed pages does not reach the number specified with SP3-251-019. 013 Average L: Bk *ENG 014 Average L: M *ENG [0 to 100 / - / 0.01 %/step] 015 Average L: C...
  • Page 530 Main SP Tables-3 [ID Sensor DetectValue: Vofset] 3311 Displays the ID sensor (regular) offset voltage for Vsg adjustments. 001 Voffset reg: Bk *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step] 002 Voffset reg: M *ENG 003 Voffset reg: C *ENG [0 to 5.5 / - / 0.01 V/step] 004 Voffset reg: Y...
  • Page 531 Main SP Tables-3 005 Vsg dif: M *ENG 006 Vsg dif: C *ENG 007 Vsg dif: Y *ENG 008 Vsg TM (Front) *ENG 009 Vsg TM (Center) *ENG 010 Vsg TM (Rear) *ENG [Vsg Adjustment Result] Displays the result of the Vsg adjustment. 3325 The displayed numbers mean the result of each sensor (sensor for Front, sensor for Bk, sensor for Cyan, sensor for Center, sensor for Magenta, sensor...
  • Page 532 Main SP Tables-3 [Fixed Supply Mode] 3401 Adjusts the toner supply rate in the fixed toner supply mode. 001 Fixed Rate: Bk *ENG [0 to 100 / 5 / 1 %/step] 002 Fixed Rate: M *ENG These SPs are used only when SP3-044 003 Fixed Rate: C *ENG is set to "1".
  • Page 533 Main SP Tables-3 [Process Control Target M/A] 3501 Adjusts the target M/A. 001 Maximum M/A: Bk *ENG 002 Maximum M/A: M *ENG [0 to 1 / 0.4 / 0.001 mg/cm /step] 003 Maximum M/A: C *ENG 004 Maximum M/A: Y *ENG [ImageQuality Adj.
  • Page 534 Main SP Tables-3 [Execution Interval: Setting] 3511 Adjusts the threshold for each adjustment mode. 001 Job End: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 250 / 1 page/step] 002 Job End: Potential Control: FC *ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 / 1 page/step] 003 Interrupt: Potential Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 / 1 page/step]...
  • Page 535 Main SP Tables-3 029 Cor Coef 2: Interrupt: FC *ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 0.01/step] 030 Max. Number Cor Threshold *ENG [0 to 99 / 5 / 1/step] Max. Number Correction *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1/step] Counter [Image Quality Adj.: Interval] 3512...
  • Page 536 Main SP Tables-3 [Execution Interval: Display] Displays the current interval for process control execution. 3515 When the machine calculates the timing for process control, it uses a number of conditions. These are the results after considering all the conditions. 001 Job End: Pot Control: BW *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 page/step] 002 Job End: Pot Control: FC...
  • Page 537 Main SP Tables-3 [ITB Idling Number] 3520 Specifies the number of the ITB idling rotation for each condition. 001 Temperature: H *ENG 002 Temperature: M *ENG [0 or 3 / 0 / 1 revolution/step] 003 Temperature: L *ENG 004 Temperature: L: Power ON *ENG [Temperature Threshold] Specifies the threshold temperature for each condition.
  • Page 538 Main SP Tables-3 Time Setting *ENG [0 to 255 / 30 / 1 sec/step] Adjusts the time-out time for the Rapi timer. [Non-use Time Process Control Set] Adjusts the threshold for the process control at stand-by. 3531 When the current condition has changed by more than the values of these SPs when compared with the conditions at the previous operation, the process control at stand-by is executed.
  • Page 539 Main SP Tables-3 011 C (Standard Target Set) *ENG [0 to 5 / 0.8 / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 012 Y (Standard Target Set) *ENG Turns on or off the environmental correction for target development 013 Environmental Correction *ENG gamma. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: Not Correct, 1: Correct 014 K (Max Correction)
  • Page 540 Main SP Tables-3 [Development DC Control: Disp] Plain: High speed, Thick 1: Middle speed, Thick 2 & FINE: Low speed 3621 Displays the development DC bias adjusted with the process control for each line speed and color. 001 Plain: Bk *ENG 002 Plain: M *ENG...
  • Page 541 Main SP Tables-3 006 Thick 1 & FINE: M *ENG 007 Thick 1 & FINE: C *ENG 008 Thick 1& FINE: Y *ENG 009 Thick 2 & FINE: Bk *ENG 010 Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 2000 / - / 1 -V/step] 011 Thick 2 &...
  • Page 542 Main SP Tables-3 008 Thick 1: Y *ENG 009 Thick 2 & FINE: Bk *ENG 010 Thick 2 & FINE: M *ENG [0 to 200 / - / 1 %/step] 011 Thick 2 & FINE: C *ENG 012 Thick 2 & FINE: Y *ENG [HST Concentration Control: Set] TD Sensor: Toner Concentration Control Setting...
  • Page 543 Main SP Tables-3 013 Adjustment: Vtcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.01 V/step] 014 Adjustment: Gamma *ENG [0 to 2.55 / - / 0.01 mg/cm /kV /step] 015 Adjustment: Vcnt Result *ENG [0 to 9 / - / 1 /step] [HST Concentration Control: M] 3712 Displays the factory settings of the magenta PCDU.
  • Page 544 Main SP Tables-3 [HST Concentration Control: C] 3713 Displays the factory settings of the cyan PCDU. 001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / - / 0.01 V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM...
  • Page 545 Main SP Tables-3 [HST Concentration Control: Y] 3714 Displays the factory settings of the yellow PCDU. 001 Vcnt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 002 Vt *ENG [0 to 5 / - / 0.1 V/step] 003 Sensitivity: HL *ENG [1.22 to 3.77 / - / 0.01 V/step] 004 Sensitivity: HM...
  • Page 546 Main SP Tables-3 [Waste Toner Full Detection] 3800 Displays/ adjusts the toner collection bottle detection settings. These SPs are used for NRS. 001 Condition *CTL [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] 002 Detection Times *CTL [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Print Page After Near Full *CTL [0 to 1000 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]...
  • Page 547 Main SP Tables-3 Mechanism Full Displays the date of the full detection *ENG Detection Date for the toner collection bottle. [Waste Toner New Detection] 3900 Turns toner collection bottle full detection on or off. [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 001 ON/OFF Setting *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON...
  • Page 548 Main SP Tables-3 012 PCU: M *ENG 013 Image Transfer Unit *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 014 Fusing Unit *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON Do not use 3902-013 if you only change 015 Cleaning Unit *ENG the cleaning unit.

  • Page 549: Sp4-Xxx (Scanner)

    Main SP Tables-4 5.5 MAIN SP TABLES-4 5.5.1 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) [Sub Scan Mag.Adjustment] 4008 Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed. 001 - *ENG [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA [L-Edge Regist Adjustment] 4010 Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.
  • Page 550 Main SP Tables-4 007 ADF: Right 008 ADF: Left [Scanner Free Run] Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following 4013 mode. Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT 001 Lamp: OFF [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] *ENG 0: OFF, 1: ON...
  • Page 551 Main SP Tables-4 4020 [Dust Check] Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/ off. 001 Dust Detect:On/Off *ENG [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: OFF, 1: ON Selects the detect level. [0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step] 002 Dust Detect:Lvl *ENG 0: lowest detection level...
  • Page 552 Main SP Tables-4 [APS Min. Size] 4303 Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are all OFF. [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: No Original 001 - *ENG 1: A5-Lengthwise (16K SEF if 4305 is set to [8K/16K Detection] 4305 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.
  • Page 553 Main SP Tables-4 4309 [Scan Size Detect:Setting] Original Density Thresh *ENG [0 to 255 / 32 / 1 digit/step] Specifies the threshold between an original area and non-original area for the scan original size detection in book scanning mode. Detection Time *ENG [20 to 100 / 60 / 20 msec/step] Specifies the detection time for the scan original size detection in book...
  • Page 554 Main SP Tables-4 [Scanner Erase Margin] *ENG 4400 Set the Mask for Original. These SPs set the area to be masked during platen (book) mode scanning. 001 Book: Leading Edge 002 Book: Trailing Edge 003 Book: Left 004 Book: Right [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] 005 ADF: Leading Edge 007 ADF: Right...
  • Page 555 Main SP Tables-4 4429 [Illegal Copy Output] 001 Copy 002 Scanner *ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step] 003 Fax 4450 [Scan Image Path Selection] Black Subtraction ON/OFF [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: OFF, 1: ON Uses or does not use the black reduction image path.
  • Page 556 Main SP Tables-4 [ACC Cor:Bright] 4505 Adjusts the offset correction for light areas of the ACC pattern. 001 Text:K *ENG 002 Text:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] 003 Text:M *ENG 004 Text:Y *ENG 005 Photo:K *ENG 006 Photo:C *ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 557 Main SP Tables-4 [Print Coverage] 4540 This SP corrects the printer coverage of 12 hues (RY, YR, YG, etc. x 4 Colors [R, G, B, Option]) for a total of 48 parameters. 001-004 RY Phase: Option/R/G/B 005-008 YR Phase: Option/R/G/B 009-012 YG Phase: Option/R/G/B 013-016 GY Phase: Option/R/G/B 017-020 GC Phase: Option/R/G/B...
  • Page 558 Main SP Tables-4 4603 [AGC Execution] 001 HP Detection Enable Executes the AGC. 002 HP Detection Disable 4609 [Gray Balance Set: R] 001 Book Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step] 002 DF Scan *ENG [-512 to 511 / -46 / 1 digit/step] 4610 [Gray Balance Set: G] 001 Book Scan...
  • Page 559 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Adj. Display] 4624 GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal Displays the black offset value for the even green signal in the CCD circuit 001 Latest: GE Color *ENG board. [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value for the odd 002 Latest: GO Color *ENG...
  • Page 560 Main SP Tables-4 [Analog Gain Adjust] 4630 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue. 001 Latest: B Color *ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step] [Digital Gain Adjust] 4631 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red. 001 Latest: RE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]...
  • Page 561 Main SP Tables-4 [Scanner Hard Error] 4647 Displays the result of the SBU connection check. [0 to 35535 / - / 1digit /step] 0: OK, Other: SBU connection check failure 001 Power-ON *ENG If the SBU connection check fails, SC144 occurs.
  • Page 562 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Adj. Display] 4656 BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal Displays the black offset value for the even Last Correct Value: BE *ENG blue signal in the CCD circuit board. Color [0 to 16383 / 0 / 1 digit/step] Displays the black offset value for the odd Last Correct Value: BO *ENG...
  • Page 563 Main SP Tables-4 4662 [Digital Gain Adjust] GE: Green Even signal, GO: Green Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value: GE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step] 002 Last Correct Value: GO Color *ENG 4663 [Digital Gain Adjust] BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal 001 Last Correct Value: BE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]...
  • Page 564 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Adj. Display] 4675 BE: Blue Even signal, BO: Blue Odd signal Displays the factory setting values of the Factory Setting: BE black level adjustment for the even blue *ENG Color signal in the CCD circuit board. [0 to 16383 / - / 1 digit/step] Displays the factory setting values of the Factory Setting: BO...
  • Page 565 Main SP Tables-4 [Digital Gain Adjust] 4681 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Green. 001 Factory Setting: GE Color *ENG [0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step] 002 Factory Setting: GO Color *ENG [Digital Gain Adjust] 4682 Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Blue.
  • Page 566 Main SP Tables-4 [White Level Peak Read] Displays the peak level of the white level scanning. 4691 If these scanned white levels are out of the correct range, SC142 may be issued. 001 GE *ENG [0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step] 002 GO *ENG [White Level Peak Read]...
  • Page 567 Main SP Tables-4 [Black Level Peak Read] Displays the level of the black level scanning. 4695 If these scanned black levels are out of the correct range, SC141 may be issued. 001 BE *ENG [0 to 1023 / - / 1 digit/step] 002 BO *ENG 4796...
  • Page 568 Main SP Tables-4 4807 [SBU Test Pattern Change] [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Scanning image 1: Fixed pattern 001 - *ENG 2: Main scanning gradation 3: Sub scanning gradation 4: Grid pattern (5 to 255 : Scanning images) 4808 [Factory Setting Input] 002 Execution Flag...
  • Page 569 Main SP Tables-4 [Man Gamma:Pht:Y] Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode. 4918 See “Printer Gamma Correction" in the Replacement and Adjustment for how to use. Enter the manual gamma adjustment screen (-001 to 008). For details, see the 009 - *ENG "Printer Gamma Correction"...
  • Page 570 Main SP Tables-4 4993 [High Light Correction] Selects the Highlight correction level. [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 001 Sensitivity Selection *ENG 0: weakest sensitivity 9: strongest sensitivity Selects the range level of Highlight correction. 002 Range Selection *ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step] 0: weakest skew correction,...
  • Page 571 Main SP Tables-5 5.6 MAIN SP TABLES-5 5.6.1 SP5-XXX (MODE) [mm/inch Display Selection] 5024 Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes. 0: mm (Europe/Asia) 001 0:mm 1:inch *CTL 1: inch (USA) [Accounting counter] Selects the counting method. 5045 NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether the counter value is negative or positive.
  • Page 572 Main SP Tables-5 [Display IP Address] 5055 Display or does not display the IP address on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF 1: ON [Coverage Counter Display] 5056 Display or does not display the coverage counter on the LCD. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *CTL...
  • Page 573 Main SP Tables-5 010 Developer: M *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display 011 Developer: C *CTL 012 Developer: Y *CTL 013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL Image Transfer Cleaning *CTL Unit 015 Fusing Unit *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Paper Transfer Roller *CTL 0: Not display, 1: Display...
  • Page 574 Main SP Tables-5 007 Development unit: C *CTL 008 Development unit: Y *CTL 009 Developer: Bk *CTL 010 Developer: M *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] 011 Developer: C *CTL 012 Developer: Y *CTL 013 Image Transfer Belt *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] Image Transfer Cleaning *CTL [0: Service] or [1: User] Unit...
  • Page 575 Main SP Tables-5 [Home Screen Login] 5074 Sets the application that appears when the home key is pressed. 0: Function disable (0:OFF 1:SDK *CTL 1: SDK application 2:Reserve) 2: Legacy application (reserved) Sets the Application product ID. 092 Product ID *CTL [0x00 to 0xffff / - / 1/step] Sets the display category of the application...
  • Page 576 Main SP Tables-5 [USB Keyboard] 5075 Sets the function of the external keyboard. 0: Disable 001 Function Setting *CTL 1: Enable Sets the external keyboard type. 0: None 1: English (NA) 2: Turkish 3: Korean 4: Chinese (Simplified) 5: Chinese (Traditional) 6: English (UK) 7: French (France) 8: French (Belgium)
  • Page 577 Main SP Tables-5 5104* [Counter: Size Setting] A3/DLT Double Count (SSP) Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT. “Yes” counts except from the bypass tray. When “Yes” is selected, A3 and DLT paper are counted twice, that is A4 x2 and LT x2 respectively. Default setting: Yes 5113 [Optional Counter Type]...
  • Page 578 Main SP Tables-5 [Mode Clear Opt. Counter Removal] 5120 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install or remove an optional counter, check the settings. [0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed 001 - *CTL but not used)/ 2: No (not removed)] [Counter Up Timing] 5121 This program specifies when the counter goes up.
  • Page 579 Main SP Tables-5 5148 Size Detection Off *CTL [0: OFF/ 1: ON] 0: Detect 1: Not Detect [Bypass Length Setting] Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not. 5150 Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.
  • Page 580 Main SP Tables-5 [Size Adjust] 5181 Adjusts the paper size for each tray. [0 to 3 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / 1 /step] 001 TRAY 1 *ENG 0: A4 LEF, 1: LT LEF, 2: B5 LEF, 3: A5 LEF [0 or 1 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 002 TRAY 2: 1 *ENG...
  • Page 581 Main SP Tables-5 [0 to 2 / 0 (EU/ASIA), 1 (NA) / - ] 018 LCT *ENG 0: A4LEF, 1: LTLEF, 2: B5LEF [RK 4] Enables or disables the prevention for RK4 (accounting device) disconnection. 5186 If the RK4 is disconnected for 10 seconds when this SP is set to "1 (Enable)", the machine automatically jams a sheet of paper and stops.
  • Page 582 Main SP Tables-5 5199 [Paper Exit After Staple End.] [ 0 or 1 / 0 / -] 001 - *CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON Enables or disables the paper feeding out from the finisher without stapling.  If this setting is "1: ON", paper is fed out without stapling at the maximum number of the finisher stapling when the machine gets a multiple printing job (over maximum number).
  • Page 583 Main SP Tables-5 5307 [Summer Time] [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step] 0: Disabled Setting 1: Enabled NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0 Enables or disables the summer time mode.  Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not activated even if this SP is set to "1".
  • Page 584 Main SP Tables-5 5404 [User Code Count Clear] 001 UCodeCtrClr Clears all counters for users. 5411 [LDAP Certification] Determines whether easy LDAP 004 Easy Certification *CTL certification is done. [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 1: On, 0: Off This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set to "1"...
  • Page 585 Main SP Tables-5 Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and password after an account lockout has occurred. 003 Cancellation On/Off *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -] 0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled) 1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are entered.
  • Page 586 Main SP Tables-5 5416 [Access Information] Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack 001 Access User Max Num *CTL detection functions. [50 to 200 / 200 / 1 users/step] Limits the number of passwords used by Access Password Max the access exclusion and password attack *CTL...
  • Page 587 Main SP Tables-5 [User Authentication] These settings should be done with the System Administrator. 5420 Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled. Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy 001 Copy *CTL applications.
  • Page 588 Main SP Tables-5 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer 041 Printer *CTL applications. [0 or 1/ 0 /1] 0: On, 1: Off 051 SDK1 [0 or 1 / 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF 061 SDK2 *CTL Determines whether certification is required...
  • Page 589 Main SP Tables-5 5501 [PM Alarm] *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Alarm off 001 PM Alarm Level 1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x 1000 > PM counter [0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: No alarm sounds 002 Original Count Alarm 1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals...
  • Page 590 Main SP Tables-5 5508* [CC Call] *CTL Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable 001* Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam. Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable 002* Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams. Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable 003* Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
  • Page 591 Main SP Tables-5 [SC/Alarm Setting] *CTL With NRS (New Remote Service) in use, these SP codes can be set to issue 5515 an SC call when an SC error occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
  • Page 592 Main SP Tables-5 5610 [Base Gamma Control Point: Command] Factory Setting *ENG Recalls the factory settings. Restore *ENG Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings. Restore *ENG Recalls the previous settings. 5611 [Toner Color in 2C] [0 to 128 / 100 / 1 /step] *ENG 128: Darkest density Adjusts the Cyan correction value of the blue signal in two-color mode.
  • Page 593 Main SP Tables-5 5618 [Color Mode Display Selection] [0 or 1 / 1 / - ] 0: ACS, Colour, Black & White, Two Colour, *CTL Single colour 1: ACD, Full Colour, Black & White Selects the color selection display on the LCD. ...
  • Page 594 Main SP Tables-5 The following service settings:  Bit switches  Gamma settings (User & Service)  Toner Limit The following user settings:  008 Printer Application Tray Priority  Menu Protect  System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver ...
  • Page 595 Main SP Tables-5 021 ECS Initializes the ECS settings. [FreeRun] Performs a free run on the copier engine.  The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence 5802 of A4/LT, A3 or A4 SEF printing from the 1st or 2nd tray. Therefore, the correct paper should be loaded in the 1st tray or 2nd tray, but paper is not fed.
  • Page 596 Main SP Tables-5 [SC Reset] Resets a type A service call condition. 5810  Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code. 001 Fusing SC Reset Hard High Temp. Detection 5811 [MachineSerial] Machine Serial Number Display 002 Display Displays the machine serial number.
  • Page 597 Main SP Tables-5 Supply *CTL Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the number and press #. Operation *CTL Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press #. 5816 [Remote Service] *CTL...
  • Page 598 Main SP Tables-5 SSL Disable Controls if RCG (Remote Communication Gate) confirmation is done by SSL during an RCG send for the @Remote over a network interface. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Yes. SSL not used. 1: No.
  • Page 599 Main SP Tables-5 RCG – C Registed This SP displays the RCG-N installation end flag. 0: Installation not completed 1: Installation completed Connect Type (N/M) This SP displays and selects the RCG-N connection method. [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Internet connection 1: Dial-up connection Cert Expire Timing...
  • Page 600 Main SP Tables-5 Proxy PortNumber This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between the embedded RCG-N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up the embedded RC Gate-N.  This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
  • Page 601 Main SP Tables-5 The period of the certification has expired and new request for an update is being sent to the GW URL. A rescue update for certification has been issued and a rescue certification setting is in progress for the rescue GW connection. The rescue certification setting is completed and the GW URL is being notified of the certification update request.
  • Page 602 Main SP Tables-5 CERT:Error Displays a number code that describes the reason for the request for update of the certification. Normal. There is no request for certification update in progress. Request for certification update in progress. The current certification has expired. An SSL error notification has been issued.
  • Page 603 Main SP Tables-5 Displays the macro version of the @Remote 087 CERT: Macro Ver. certification. Displays the PAC version of the @Remote 088 CERT: PAC Ver. certification. Displays ID2 for the @Remote certification. Spaces 089 CERT: ID2 Code are displayed as underscores (_). Asteriskes (****) indicate that no @Remote certification exists.
  • Page 604 Main SP Tables-5 Selection Country Select the country where embedded RCG-M is installed in the machine. After selecting the country, you must also set the following SP codes for embedded RCG-M:  SP5816-153  SP5816-154  SP5816-161 0: Japan, 1: USA, 2: Canada, 3: UK, 4: Germany, 5: France, 6: Italy, 7: Netherlands, 8: Belgium, 9: Luxembourg, 10: Spain Line Type AutomaticJudgment Press [Execute].
  • Page 605 Main SP Tables-5 Selection Dial / Push This SP displays the classification (tone or pulse) of the telephone line to the access point for embedded RCG-M. The number displayed (0 or 1) is the result of the execution of SP5816-151. However, this setting can also be changed manually.
  • Page 606 Main SP Tables-5 Dial Up Password Use this SP to set a password for access to remote dial up. Follow these rules when setting a user name:  Name length: Up to 32 characters  Spaces and # allowed but the entire entry must be enclosed by double quotation marks (").
  • Page 607 Main SP Tables-5 Line Connecting This SP sets the connection conditions for the customer. This setting dedicates the line to RCG-M only, or sets the line for sharing between RCG-M and a fax unit. [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step] 0: Sharing Fax 1: No Sharing Fax ...
  • Page 608 Main SP Tables-5 Regist Status Displays a number that indicates the status of the @Remote service device. 0: Neither the registered device by the external nor embedded RCG device is set. 1: The embedded RCG device is being set. Only Box registration is completed.
  • Page 609 Main SP Tables-5 Confirm Place Displays the result of the notification sent to the device from the GW URL in answer to the inquiry request. Displayed only when the result is registered at the GW URL. 206 Register Execute Executes "Embedded RCG Registration". Register Result Displays a number that indicates the registration result.
  • Page 610 Main SP Tables-5 Attempted setting with illegal entries for -12004 certification and ID2. @Remote communication is prohibited. -12005 The device has an Embedded RC gate-related problem. A confirmation request was made after -12006 the confirmation had been already completed. Operation Error, Incorrect Setting The request number used at registration -12007...
  • Page 611 Main SP Tables-5 -2397 Incorrect ID2 format -2398 Incorrect request number format Releases the machine from its embedded 209 Instal Clear RCG setup. 250 CommLog Print Prints the communication log. 5821 [Remote Service Address] Sets the IP address of the RCG (Remote 002 RCG IP Address *CTL Communication Gate) destination for call...
  • Page 612 Main SP Tables-5 5828 [Network Setting] *CTL Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility. 1284 Compatibility [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] (Centro) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled Enables or disables ECP Compatibility. [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step] 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled 052 ECP (Centro) This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50...
  • Page 613 Main SP Tables-5 Enables or disables the Web operation. 091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [0 or 1 / 1 / – ] 0: Disable, 1: Enable This is the IPv6 local address link referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b) in the format: Active IPv6 Link Local "Link Local Address"...
  • Page 614 236 Web Item visible bit0: Net RICOH bit1: Consumable Supplier bit2-15: Reserved (all) Displays or does not display the link to Net RICOH Web shopping link on the top page and link page of the web system. visible [0 to 1 / 1 / 1]...
  • Page 615 Main SP Tables-5 5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL - 001 HDD Formatting (ALL) 002 HDD Formatting (IMH) 003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail) 004 HDD Formatting (Job Log) HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts) Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode 006 HDD Formatting (User Info) only if there is a hard disk error.
  • Page 616 Main SP Tables-5 073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3 074 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4 075 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 01, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4, 6: 2/3 076 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2:...
  • Page 617 Main SP Tables-5 Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step] Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document management server via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format. Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed. Sets the IP address for the primary capture server.
  • Page 618 Main SP Tables-5 Reso: Copy (Mono) [0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step] Selects the resolution for BW copy mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi This is basically adjusted by the remote system.
  • Page 619 Main SP Tables-5 This is basically adjusted by the remote system. Reso: Scan (Mono) [0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step] Selects the resolution for BW scanning mode. This is basically adjusted by the remote system. 0: 600dpi/ 1: 400dpi/ 2: 300dpi/ 3: 200dpi/ 4: 150dpi/ 5: 100dpi/ 6: 75dpi 5840 [IEEE 802.11] [1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]...
  • Page 620 Main SP Tables-5 0 x 00 to 0 x FF / 0 x FF to Auto / -] 0 x FF to Auto [Default] 0 x 11 - 55M Fix 0 x 10 - 48M Fix 0 x 0F - 36M Fix 0 x 0E - 18M Fix 0 x 0D - 12M Fix 008 Transmission Speed...
  • Page 621 Main SP Tables-5 Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11. 044 11g Slot Time *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 Selects the debug level for WPA authentication application. 045 WPA Debug Lvl *CTL [1 to 3 / 3 / 1] 1: Info, 2: warning, 3: error This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
  • Page 622 Main SP Tables-5 5844 [USB] 0x01: Full speed Transfer Rate *CTL 0x04: Auto Change Adjusts the USB transfer rate. 002 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU 003 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU Displays the development release version 004 Device Release Number *CTL number.
  • Page 623 Main SP Tables-5 Delivery Server Model [0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step] Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device. 0: Unknown 1: SG1 Provided 2: SG1 Package 3: SG2 Provided 4: SG2 Package Delivery Svr.
  • Page 624 Main SP Tables-5 Server Port Number (Primary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Server URL Path (Primary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Server Scheme (Secondary) DFU This is used for the scan router program. Server Port Number (Secondary) DFU This is used for the scan router program.
  • Page 625 Main SP Tables-5 Maximum Entries [2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step] Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle. If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed. Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire...
  • Page 626 Main SP Tables-5 This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it onto the new HDD.
  • Page 627 Main SP Tables-5 Downloads all directory information from the SD 052 Restore All Addr Book card. Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the service slot. Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this machine. This feature does not work if the card is 053 Clear Backup Info write-protected.
  • Page 628 Main SP Tables-5 065 Complexity Option 4 DFU Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server address book that is used 091 FTP Auth Port Setting in the identification mode. [0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step] Shows the status of the encryption function 094 Encryption Stat for the address book data.
  • Page 629 Main SP Tables-5 0: 1x 1: 1/2x 2: 1/3x 007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi 3: 1/4x 4: 1/6x 5: 1/8x Network Quality Default for JPEG Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. This function is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.
  • Page 630 Main SP Tables-5 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4 bits) Access Ctrl: uadministration (Lower 4bits) Repository: Download Image Setting Specifies the max size of the image data that Repository: Download Image the machine can download. Max. Size [1 to 2048 / 2048 / 1 MB /step] 210 Setting: LogType: Job1 211 Setting: LogType: Job2 212 Setting: LogType: Access...
  • Page 631 Main SP Tables-5 5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL Replacement of Circuit Classification Japan Only The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason the G4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.
  • Page 632 Main SP Tables-5 5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: OFF, 1: ON Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this feature is switched on. Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set with SP5-858 are satisfied.
  • Page 633 Main SP Tables-5 [Debug Save When] *CTL These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the 5858 destination selected by SP5857-002. SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC error codes.
  • Page 634 Main SP Tables-5 5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour/step] Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception. The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this prescribed time.
  • Page 635 Main SP Tables-5 5870 [Common Key Info Writing] Writes to flash ROM the common proof for 001 Writing *CTL validating the device for @Remote specifications. Initializes the data area of the common 003 Initialize *CTL proof for validating. 5873 [SD Card Appli Move] This SP copies the application programs from the original 001 Move Exec SD card in SD card slot 2 to an SD card in SD card slot 1.
  • Page 636 Main SP Tables-5 5878 [Option Setup] Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. 001 Data Overwrite Security Press "EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the machine off and on. 002 HDD Encryption Installs the HDD Encryption unit. 5881 [Fixed Phrase Block Erasing] 001 - Deletes the fixed phrase.
  • Page 637 Main SP Tables-5 Selects the display type for the document box list. 050 DocSvr Format *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1] 0: Thumbnail, 1: Icon, 2: Details Sets the number of documents to be 051 DocSvr Trans *CTL displayed in the document box list.
  • Page 638 Main SP Tables-5 [SD Get Counter] 5887 This SP determines whether the ROM can be updated. This SP sends a text file to an SD card inserted in SD card Slot 2 (lower slot). The operation stores. The file is stored in a folder created in the root directory of the SD card called SD_COUNTER.
  • Page 639 Main SP Tables-5 [SDK Application Counter] *CTL 5893 Displays the counter name of each SDK application. 001 SDK-1 002 SDK-2 003 SDK-3 004 SDK-4 005 SDK-5 006 SDK-6 [External Counter Setting] 5894 Test Name1_1 001 Switch Charge Mode *ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] [Application Invalidation] Enables or disables the printer or scanner application.
  • Page 640 Main SP Tables-5 5913 [Switchover Permission Time] Print Application Timer *CTL [3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step] Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gain control of the display.
  • Page 641 Main SP Tables-5 5987 [Mech. Counter] This SP detects that a mechanical counter 001 0: OFF / 1: ON *ENG device is removed. If it is detected, SC610 occurs. [SP print mode] 5990 Prints out the SMC sheets. 001 All (Data List) 002 SP (Mode Data List) 003 User Program 004 Logging Data...
  • Page 642 Main SP Tables-5 [SP Text mode] 5992 Exports the SMC sheet data to the SD Card. 001 All (Data List) 002 SP (Mode Data List) 003 User Program 004 Logging Data 005 Diagnostic Report 006 Non-Default 007 NIB Summary Press “Execute” key to start exporting the SMC data in the SP mode display.

  • Page 643: Sp6-Xxx (Peripherals)

    Main SP Tables-6 5.7 MAIN SP TABLES-6 5.7.1 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) 6006 [ADF Adjustment] Adjusts the side-to-side and leading registration of originals with the ARDF. 001 Side-to-Side Regist: Front *ENG [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ] 002 Side-to-Side Regist: Rear 003 Leading Edge Registration *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step ]...
  • Page 644 Main SP Tables-6 [ADF Free Run] 6009 Performs a DF free run in simplex, duplex mode or stamp mode. 001 Free Run Simplex Motion *ENG 002 Free Run Duplex Motion *ENG 003 Free Run Stamp Motion *ENG [Stamp Position Adj.] Fax Stamp Position Adjustment 6010 Adjusts the horizontal position of the stamp on the scanned originals.
  • Page 645 Main SP Tables-6 [DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment 6017 Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF. 001 - *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step] [Skew Correction Moving Setting] 6020 Turns the original skew correction in the ARDF for all original sizes on or off. [0 or 1 / 0 / - ] 001 - *ENG...
  • Page 646 Main SP Tables-6 [Skew Correction: Buckle Adj.] 6130 Adjusts the paper buckle for each paper size. 001 A3T *ENG 002 B4T *ENG 003 A4T *ENG 004 A4Y *ENG 005 B5T *ENG 006 B5Y *ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step] 007 DLT-T *ENG 008 LG-T...
  • Page 647 Main SP Tables-6 008 LG-T *ENG 009 LT-T *ENG 010 LT-Y *ENG 011 12*18 *ENG 012 Other *ENG [Jogger Fence Fine Adj] This SP adjusts the distance between the jogger fences and the sides of the 6132 stack on the finisher stapling tray in the (Booklet) Finisher B804/B805. The adjustment is done perpendicular to the direction of paper feed.
  • Page 648 Main SP Tables-6 [Staple Position Adjustment] Adjusts the staple position for each finisher (B408/B804/B805). 6133 + Value: Moves the staple position to the rear side. - Value: Moves the staple position to the front side. 001 Finisher1 *ENG [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 1/step] [Saddle Stitch Position Adjust] 6134 Use this SP to adjust the stapling position of the booklet stapler when paper is...
  • Page 649 Main SP Tables-6 005 DLT-T 006 LG-T 007 LT-T 008 12*18 009 Other [Folding Number] 6136 Sets the number of times that folding is done in the Booklet Finisher B804. 001 - [2 to 30 / 2 / 1 time/step] 6139 [FIN (KIN) INPUT Check] Finisher (B408) Input Check Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the booklet finisher.
  • Page 650 Main SP Tables-6 [Max. Pre-Stack Sheet] *ENG Number of Pre-Stack Sheets This SP sets the number of sheets sent to the pre-stack tray. 6149  You may need to adjust this setting or switch it off when feeding thick or slick paper.
  • Page 651 Main SP Tables-6 [OUTPUT Check] 6155 Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the 1 bin tray (D536) ( p.5-376 in this section) 001 1 bin: Junction Solenoid [INPUT Check] Displays the signals received from sensors and switches of the two-tray paper 6160 feed unit (D537), LCT 2000 (D538) and LCT 1200 (D539) ( p.5-376 in this...

  • Page 652: Sp7-Xxx (Data Log)

    Main SP Tables-7 5.8 MAIN SP TABLES-7 5.8.1 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) [Total SC] 7401 Displays the number of SC codes detected. 001 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ] 002 Total SC Counter *CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ] [SC History] Logs the SC codes detected.
  • Page 653 Main SP Tables-7 [Total Paper Jam] 7502 Displays the total number of jams detected. 001 Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ] 002 Total Jam Counter * CTL [0 to 65535 / - / 1/step ] [Total Original Jam] 7503 Displays the total number of original jams.
  • Page 654 Main SP Tables-7 017 Registration Sn: On (Tray) *CTL 018 Fusing Entrance: On *CTL 019 Fusing Exit: On *CTL 020 Paper Exit: On *CTL 021 Bridge Tray Exit: On *CTL 022 Bridge Relay: On *CTL 024 Junction Gate Sensor : On *CTL 025 Duplex Exit: On *CTL...
  • Page 655 Main SP Tables-7 102 Finisher Staple: KIN *CTL 103 Finisher Exit: KIN *CTL 105 Finisher Tray Lift Motor: KIN *CTL 106 Finisher Jogger Motor: KIN *CTL 107 Finisher Shift Motor: KIN *CTL 108 Finisher Staple Motor: KIN *CTL 109 Finisher Exit Motor: KIN *CTL 191 Finisher Entrance: EUP *CTL...
  • Page 656 Main SP Tables-7 004 Skew Correction Sn: On *CTL 005 Scanning Entrance Sn: On *CTL 006 Registration Sensor: On *CTL 007 Original Exit Sensor: On *CTL 008 Reverse Sensor: On *CTL 053 Separation Sensor: Off *CTL 054 Skew Correction Sn: Off *CTL 055 Scanning Entrance Sn: Off *CTL...
  • Page 657 Main SP Tables-7 164 LG SEF *CTL 166 LT SEF *CTL 172 HLT SEF *CTL 255 Others *CTL [0 to 9999 / - / 1 sheet/step ] [Plotter Jam History] 7507 Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams. 001 - 002 - 003 - 004 -...
  • Page 658 Main SP Tables-7 006 - 007 - 008 - 009 - 010 - Part Replacement Operation ON/OFF 7624 Selects the PM maintenance for each part. 001 Drum unit: Bk 002 Drum unit: M 003 Drum unit: C 004 Drum unit: Y 005 Development unit: Bk [0 or 1 / 1 -] 006 Development unit: M...
  • Page 659 Main SP Tables-7 018 Fusing Roller 019 Pressure Roller 7801 [ROM No/ Firmware Version] Displays all versions and ROM numbers 002 Engine *CTL in the machine. [PM Counter Display] (Page, Unit, [Color]) Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit. PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.
  • Page 660 Main SP Tables-7 012 Page: Developer: C 013 Page: Developer: Y 014 Page: Image Transfer 015 Page: Cleaning Unit 016 Page: Fusing Unit 017 Page: Paper Transfer Unit 018 Page: Toner Collection Bottle 019 Page: Fusing Roller 020 Page: Pressure Roller Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current maintenance unit.
  • Page 661 Main SP Tables-7 032 Rotation: PCU: M mm/step ] 033 Rotation: PCU: C 034 Rotation: PCU: Y 035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk 036 Rotation: Development Unit: M 037 Rotation: Development Unit: C 038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y 039 Rotation: Developer: Bk 040 Rotation: Developer: M 041 Rotation: Developer: C 042 Rotation: Developer: Y...
  • Page 662 Main SP Tables-7 Displays the running time of the pump unit for each current maintenance unit. [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 msec/step] When a unit is replaced, and SP7804-xxx is executed, the current PM counter value is moved to the PM Counter - Previous (SP7-906-020 to 112) and is reset to “0”.
  • Page 663 Main SP Tables-7 Measurement (%): Toner Collection bottle 078 Rotation (%): Fusing Roller 079 Rotation (%): Pressure Roller Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current revolution / Target revolution)  100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up. The Rotation (%) counter is based on rotations, not prints.
  • Page 664 Main SP Tables-7 091 - Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current printouts / Target printouts)  100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up. The Page (%) counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
  • Page 665 Main SP Tables-7 109 - *ENG Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current printouts / Target printouts)  100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up. The Page (%) counter is based on printouts, not revolutions. If the number of printouts reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
  • Page 666 Main SP Tables-7 012 Developer: Bk 013 Developer: M 014 Developer: C 015 Developer: Y 016 Developer: All 017 ITB Unit 018 Cleaning Unit 019 Fusing Unit 020 PTR Unit 021 Toner Collection Bottle 022 Fusing Roller (Heating Roller) 023 Pressure Roller 024 Pump Unit: Bk 025 Pump Unit: M 026 Pump Unit: C...
  • Page 667 Main SP Tables-7 001 Diag. Result *CTL - 7835 [ACC Counter] 001 Copy ACC *CTL Displays the ACC exectuion times for each mode. 002 Printer ACC *CTL Total Memory Size 7836 Displays the memory capacity of the controller system. [DF Glass Dust Check] Counts the number of occurrences (0 to 65,535) when dust was detected on 7852 the scanning glass of the ADF or resets the dust detection counter.
  • Page 668 Main SP Tables-7 009 Developer: Bk *ENG 010 Developer: M *ENG 011 Developer: C *ENG 012 Developer: Y *ENG 013 Image Transfer *ENG 014 Cleaning Unit *ENG 015 Fusing Unit *ENG 016 Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 255 / - / 1 /step] 017 Tonner Collection Bottle *ENG 018 Fusing Roller...
  • Page 669 Main SP Tables-7 [Coverage Range] Sets the color coverage threshold. Coverage rate = Coverage per page / A4 full coverage (dots) x 100 There are three coverage counters: Color 1, Color 2, and Color 3  [A] 5% (default) is adjustable with SP7855-001. ...
  • Page 670 Main SP Tables-7 008 Page: Development Unit: Y 009 Page: Developer: Bk 010 Page: Developer: M 011 Page: Developer: C 012 Page: Developer: Y 013 Page: Image Transfer 014 Page: Cleaning Unit 015 Page: Fusing Unit 016 Page: Paper Transfer Unit *ENG [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 page/step] 017 Page: Toner Collection Bottle...
  • Page 671 Main SP Tables-7 036 Rotation: Development Unit: M 037 Rotation: Development Unit: C 038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y 039 Rotation: Developer: Bk 040 Rotation: Developer: M 041 Rotation: Developer: C 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation: Image Transfer 044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit 045 Rotation: Fusing Unit 046 Rotation: Paper Transfer Unit [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step]...
  • Page 672 Main SP Tables-7 061 Rotation %: PCU: *ENG Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current revolution / Target revolution)  100. This shows how much of the unit’s expected lifetime has been used up. The Rotation % counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reaches the limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit.
  • Page 673 Main SP Tables-7 076 Rotation %: Paper Transfer Unit Measurement %: Toner Collection bottle 078 Rotation (%): Fusing Roller 079 Rotation (%): Pressure Roller Displays the value given by the following formula: (Current count / Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values in the counter for the part, and “Yield count”...
  • Page 674 Main SP Tables-7 091 Page %: PCU: Bk 092 Page %: PCU: M 093 Page %: PCU: C 094 Page %: PCU: Y 095 Page %: Development Unit: Bk 096 Page %: Development Unit: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 %/step ] 097 Page %: Development Unit: C 098 Page %: Development Unit: Y 099 Page %: Developer: Bk...
  • Page 675 Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle Bk] 7931 Displays the toner bottle information for Bk. 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No.
  • Page 676 Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle M] 7932 Displays the toner bottle information for M. 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No.
  • Page 677 Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle C] 7933 Displays the toner bottle information for C. 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No.
  • Page 678 Main SP Tables-7 [Toner Bottle Y] 7934 Displays the toner bottle information for Y. 001 Machine Serial ID 002 Cartridge Ver 003 Brand ID 004 Area ID 005 Product ID 006 Color ID *ENG 007 Maintenance ID 008 New Product Information 009 Recycle Counter 010 Date 011 Serial No.
  • Page 679 Main SP Tables-7 7935 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 1 for Bk. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for Bk.
  • Page 680 Main SP Tables-7 7936 [Toner Bottle Log 1: M] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 1 for M. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for M.
  • Page 681 Main SP Tables-7 7937 [Toner Bottle Log 1: C] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 1 for C. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for C.
  • Page 682 Main SP Tables-7 7938 [Toner Bottle Log 1: Y] 001 Serial No. 002 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 1 for Y. 003 Attachment: Total Counter 004 Refill Information 011 Serial No. 012 Attachment Date Displays the toner bottle *ENG information log 2 for Y.
  • Page 683 Main SP Tables-7 [Unit Replacement Date] 7950 Displays the replacement date of each PM unit. 001 Image Transfer Belt 002 Cleaning Unit 003 Paper Transfer Unit 004 Fusing Unit 005 Toner Collection Bottle 006 AIT:Bk 007 AIT:M 008 AIT:C *ENG 009 AIT:Y 010 Fusing Roller 011 Pressure Roller...
  • Page 684 Main SP Tables-7 [Remaining Day Counter] 7951 Displays the remaining unit life of each PM unit. 001 Page: PCU: Bk 002 Page: PCU: M 003 Page: PCU: C 004 Page: PCU: Y 005 Page: Development Unit: Bk 006 Page: Development Unit: M *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step] 007 Page: Development Unit: C...
  • Page 685 Main SP Tables-7 035 Rotation: Development Unit: Bk 036 Rotation: Development Unit: M 037 Rotation: Development Unit: C 038 Rotation: Development Unit: Y 039 Rotation: Developer: Bk 040 Rotation: Developer: M 041 Rotation: Developer: C 042 Rotation: Developer: Y 043 Rotation: Image Transfer *ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1 day/step] 044 Rotation: Cleaning Unit...
  • Page 686 Main SP Tables-7 110 Minimum: Developer: M 111 Minimum: Developer: C 112 Minimum: Developer: Y 113 Minimum: Image Transfer 114 Minimum: Cleaning Unit 115 Minimum: Fusing Unit 116 Minimum: Paper Transfer Unit 117 Minimum: Fusing Roller 118 Minimum: Pressure Roller 119 Minimum: Pump Unit: Bk Displays either Remaining Day 120 Minimum: Pump Unit: M...
  • Page 687 Main SP Tables-7 021 Day Threshold: PCU: Bk 022 Day Threshold: PCU: M 023 Day Threshold: PCU: C 024 Day Threshold: PCU: Y Day Threshold: Development Unit: Bk Day Threshold: Development Unit: M Adjusts the threshold day for the near end Day Threshold: fro each PM unit.
  • Page 688 Main SP Tables-7 Day Threshold: Toner Collection Bottle 038 Rotation: PCU Bk 039 Rotation: PCU M *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] 040 Rotation: PCU C 041 Rotation: PCU Y Rotation: Development Unit: Bk Rotation: Development Unit: M *CTL [0 to 999999999 / 0 / 1 mm/step] Rotation: Development Unit: C...
  • Page 689 Main SP Tables-7 Page: Development Unit: 058 Page: Developer: Bk 059 Page: Developer: M *CTL [0 to 999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] 060 Page: Developer: C 061 Page: Developer: Y 7953 [Operation Env. Log: PCU: Bk] Displays the PCDU rotation distance in each specified operation environment.
  • Page 690 Main SP Tables-7 016 25<=T<30:80<=H<=100 017 30<=T<35:0<=H<30 018 30<=T<35:30<=H<55 019 30<=T<35:55<=H<80 020 30<=T<35:80<=H<=100 021 35 <= T [Operation Env. Log Clear] 7954 Clears the operation environment log. 7955 Fusing Stop Near End: Page [1 to 999999 / 318000 / 1 sheet/step] Displays the threshold sheet for the heating roller near end.

  • Page 691: Sp8-Xxx: Data Log2

    Main SP Tables-8 5.9 MAIN SP TABLES-8 5.9.1 SP8-XXX: DATA LOG2 Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.
  • Page 692 Main SP Tables-8 Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L: counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in document server mode (from the document server window), or from Local storage another mode, such as from a printer driver or by (document server)
  • Page 693 Main SP Tables-8 Abbreviation What it means Comb Combine Comp Compression Deliv Delivery Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, DesApl Print) used to store the job on the document server, for example. Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed. Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides Emul...
  • Page 694 Main SP Tables-8 Abbreviation What it means New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely. "NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan. Original for scanning OrgJam Original Jam Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the Palm 2 network, and allows files to moved around, combined, and...
  • Page 695 Main SP Tables-8 Abbreviation What it means Server TonEnd Toner End TonSave Toner Save TXJob Send, Transmission Yellow, Magenta, Cyan YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black  All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear. T:Total Jobs *CTL 8 001...
  • Page 696 Main SP Tables-8  A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in the broadcast are not counted separately).  A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to their destinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not be counted until the transmission has been completed.
  • Page 697 Main SP Tables-8 8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL 8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL These SPs reveal how files printed from the document server were stored on the document 8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL server originally. 8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs 8 025 S:Pjob/LS...
  • Page 698 Main SP Tables-8 8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL 8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL These SPs reveal what applications were used to output documents from the document 8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL server. 8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] The L: counter counts the number of jobs 8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL...
  • Page 699 Main SP Tables-8 8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL These SPs count the applications used to 8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL send files from the document server over the telephone line or over a network (attached to 8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL an e-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax).
  • Page 700 Main SP Tables-8 L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the document 8 066 server mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specified from the print window within document server mode. O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 701 Main SP Tables-8 T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 071 These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pages in the job, regardless of which application was used. C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 072 These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based on the number of pages in the job.
  • Page 702 Main SP Tables-8 8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501 to 700 Pages 8 07x 6 6 to 10 Pages 8 07x 13 701 to 1000 Pages 8 07x 7 11 to 20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001 to Pages ...
  • Page 703 Main SP Tables-8  These counters count jobs, not pages.  This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application, including documents stored on the document server.  If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.
  • Page 704 Main SP Tables-8 T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) 8 131 scanned and attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server was used or not. S: S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 705 Main SP Tables-8 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 141 These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned and sent to a Scan Router server. S: Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 145 These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned in scanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.
  • Page 706 Main SP Tables-8 8 15x 3 ACS  These counters count jobs, not pages.  If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.  If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted. ...
  • Page 707 Main SP Tables-8 T:Scan to Media 8 181 *CTL These SPs count the scanned pages in a Jobs media by the scanner application. S:Scan to Media [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 185 *CTL Jobs -001 B/W -002 Color -003 ACS 8 191 T:Total Scan PGS...
  • Page 708 Main SP Tables-8 T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission 8 201 are not counted.
  • Page 709 Main SP Tables-8 ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 221 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side scanning. Number of front sides fed for scanning: With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either simplex or duplex scanning.
  • Page 710 Main SP Tables-8 Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 231 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode to determine the work load on the ADF. Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be 8 231 1 Large Volume loaded in the ADF at one time.
  • Page 711 Main SP Tables-8 T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 241 These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used. C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 242 These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.
  • Page 712 Main SP Tables-8 8 24x 10: Color 8 24x 11: Other  If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switches from ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode. 8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL...
  • Page 713 Main SP Tables-8 8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL These SPs count the number of pages scanned using a TWAIN driver. These counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is used for delivery functions. 8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] Note: At the present time, these counters perform identical counts.
  • Page 714 Main SP Tables-8 S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan 8 305 application. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-445]. L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored...
  • Page 715 Main SP Tables-8 T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 311 These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned by applications that can specify resolution settings. S: Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned 8 315 by applications that can specify resolution settings.
  • Page 716 Main SP Tables-8  These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following pages are not counted as printed pages: - Blank pages in a duplex printing job. - Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets. - Reports printed to confirm counts.
  • Page 717 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications. C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 422 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number...
  • Page 718 Main SP Tables-8 8 42x 6 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up) 8 42x 7 4 in1 4 pages on 1 side (4-Up) 8 42x 8 6 in1 6 pages on 1 side (6-Up) 8 42x 9 8 in1 8 pages on 1 side (8-Up) 8 42x 10 9 in1 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)
  • Page 719 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below, regardless of which application was used. C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 432 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three features below with the copy application.
  • Page 720 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 441 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 442 These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the copy application.
  • Page 721 Main SP Tables-8 8 44x 7 LG 8 44x 8 LT 8 44x 9 HLT 8 44x 10 Full Bleed 8 44x 254 Other (Standard) 8 44x 255 Other (Custom)  These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF. PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 722 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.  These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter 8 461 is based on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers.
  • Page 723 Main SP Tables-8 8 46x 8 Other PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 471 These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed. 8 471 1 < 49% 8 471 2 50% to 99% 8 471 3 100% 8 471 4 101% to 200% 8 471 5 201% <...
  • Page 724 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/Col 8 491 *CTL Mode C:PrtPGS/Col 8 492 *CTL Mode F:PrtPGS/Col These SPs count the number of pages 8 493 *CTL Mode printed in the Color Mode by each application. L:PrtPGS/Col 8 496 *CTL Mode O:PrtPGS/Col 8 497 *CTL Mode 8 49x 1 B/W...
  • Page 725 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 511 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed. P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 514 These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pages printed.
  • Page 726 Main SP Tables-8 T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all applications. C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1] 8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy application.
  • Page 727 Main SP Tables-8  If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are still counted.  The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted.
  • Page 728 Main SP Tables-8 8 581 14 Full Color Print 8 581 15 Mono Color Print 8 581 16 Full Color GPC 8 581 17 Twin Color Mode Print 8 581 18 Full Color Print (Twin) 8 581 19 Mono Color Print (Twin) 8 581 20 Full Color Total (CV) 8 581 21 Mono Color Total (CV) 8 581 22 Full Color Print (CV)
  • Page 729 Main SP Tables-8 8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down by color output. 8 584 1 B/W 8 584 2 Mono Color 8 584 3 Full Color 8 584 4 Single Color 8 584 5 Two Color 8 586...
  • Page 730 Main SP Tables-8 T: Coverage Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 601 These SPs count the total coverage for each color and the total printout pages for each printing mode. 8 601 1 B/W 8 601 2 Color 8 601 11 B/W Printing Pages 8 601 12 Color Printing Pages 8 601 21 Coverage Counter 1...
  • Page 731 Main SP Tables-8 T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 631 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number. F:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 633 These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone number.
  • Page 732 Main SP Tables-8  If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as B/W or Color.  At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643 are the same. ...
  • Page 733 Main SP Tables-8 T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router server by both Scan and LS applications. S:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan...
  • Page 734 Main SP Tables-8 8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax application only, so the counts for SP8 681 and 8 683 F:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL SP8 683 are the same.
  • Page 735 Main SP Tables-8 TX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to 8 701 send them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
  • Page 736 Main SP Tables-8 8 731 T:Scan PGS/Media *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] S:Scan PGS/Media *CTL 8 735 These SPs count the number of pages scanned and saved in a meia by each scanner mode. x 1 B/W x 2 Color RX PGS/Port *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 737 Main SP Tables-8 Toner_Bottle_Info. *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles. 8 781 NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same. 8 781 1 Toner: BK The number of black-toner bottles 8 781 2 Toner: Y...
  • Page 738 Main SP Tables-8 CVr Cnt: 0-10% *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is from 0% to 10%. 8 851 11 0 to 2%: BK 8 851 31 5 to 7%: BK 8 851 12 0 to 2%: Y 8 851 32 5 to 7%: Y...
  • Page 739 Main SP Tables-8 8 871 4 C CVr Cnt: 31%- *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 881 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color is 31% or higher. 8 881 1 BK 8 881 2 Y 8 881 3 M 8 881 4 C...
  • Page 740 Main SP Tables-8 Page/Toner_prev2 *ENG [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 911 These SPs display the amount of the remaining 2nd previous toner for each color. 8 911 1 BK 8 911 2 Y 8 911 3 M 8 911 4 C Cvr Cnt/Total *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]...
  • Page 741 Main SP Tables-8 Machine Status *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each 8 941 operation mode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.
  • Page 742 Main SP Tables-8 AddBook Register *CTL 8 951 These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages data registration. User Code/User 8 951 1 User code registrations. 8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations. 8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.
  • Page 743 Main SP Tables-8 Admin. Counter List *CTL [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1] 8 999 Displays the total coverage and total printout number for each color. 8 999 1 Total 8 999 2 Copy: Full Color 8 999 3 Copy: BW 8 999 4 Copy: Single Color 8 999 5 Copy: Two Color 8 999 6 Printer Full Color...

  • Page 744: Input Check Table

    Main SP Tables-9 5.10 MAIN SP TABLES-9 5.10.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Each digit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table. Bit No. Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1...
  • Page 745 Main SP Tables-9 Paper not 5803 14 1st Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 5803 15 2nd Paper Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 5803 16 Exit Sensor Paper detected detected 5803 17 Tray Full Exit Sensor Paper not full Paper full Paper not...
  • Page 746 Main SP Tables-9 Actuator not Actuator 5803 34 Drum Phase Sensor: Bk detected detected Actuator not Actuator 5803 35 Drum Phase Sensor: M detected detected Actuator not Actuator 5803 36 Drum Phase Sensor: C detected detected Actuator not Actuator 5803 37 Drum Phase Sensor: Y detected detected Front door...
  • Page 747 Main SP Tables-9 Paper Transfer Contact Motor 5803 61 Not contact Contact Position 5803 62 Toner Relay Motor: Lock Normal Lock 5803 63 ITB Drive Motor: Lock Normal Lock K Drum/Development Drive Motor: 5803 64 Normal Lock Lock M Drum/Development Drive Motor: 5803 65 Normal Lock...
  • Page 748 Main SP Tables-9 5803 102 Mechanical Counter FC: Set Not set 5803 103 Key Counter: Set Not set 5803 110 IOB Version 5803 200 Scanner HP Sensor Not HP 5803 201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Closed Table 1: Paper Height Sensor 0: Deactivated, 1: Activated (actuator inside sensor) Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1...
  • Page 749 Main SP Tables-9 Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) Switch 1 is used for tray set detection. 0: Pushed, 1: Not pushed Models Switch Location North America Europe/Asia 4 (bit0) 3 (bit1) 2 (bit2) 11" x 17" SEF A3 SEF (A3 SEF) (11"...
  • Page 750 Main SP Tables-9 Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) 0: ON, 1: OFF By-pass Paper Size Sensor Length EU/ASIA Sensor bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 HLT SEF A6 SEF HLT SEF A6 SEF HLT SEF A5 SEF HLT SEF A5 SEF LT/LG SEF* A4 SEF LT/LG SEF*...
  • Page 751 Main SP Tables-9 ARDF (D630) Reading 6007 Description Original Length 1 (B5 Detection Paper not 6007 1 Paper detected Sensor) detected Original Length 2 (A4 Detection Paper not 6007 2 Paper detected Sensor) detected Original Length 3 (LG Detection Paper not 6007 3 Paper detected Sensor)
  • Page 752 Main SP Tables-9 Paper not 6007 13 Registration Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6007 14 Exit Sensor Paper detected detected 6007 15 Feed Cover Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open 6007 16 Lift Up Sensor ADF cover close ADF cover open Paper not 6007 17 Inverter Sensor...
  • Page 753 Main SP Tables-9 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637, D636) Reading 6140 Description Paper not 6140 1 Entrance Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6140 2 Proof Exit Sensor Paper detected detected 6140 3 Proof Full Detection Sensor Not Full Full Paper not Paper 6140 4 Trailing Edge Detection: Shift detected*1...
  • Page 754 Main SP Tables-9 6140 17 Skew HP Sensor Not HP 6140 18 Limit SW Not Limit Limit 6140 19 DOOR SW Closed Open 6140 20 Stapler 1 Rotation Not HP Staple not 6140 21 Staple Detection Staple detected detected Staple not 6140 22 Staple Leading Edge Detection Staple detected detected...
  • Page 755 Main SP Tables-9 Paper not 6140 37 Folder Pass Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6140 38 Saddle Full Sensor: Front Paper detected* detected* Paper not 6140 39 Saddle Full Sensor: Rear Paper detected* detected* Saddle Stitch Stapler 1 Rotation: 6140 40 Not HP Front...

  • Page 756: Sheet Finisher (D588)

    Main SP Tables-9 *1: Combination of DIP SW 1 and SW 2 DIP SW 1 DIP SW 2 Punch Type Japan Europe North America North Europe *2: Please refer to "Lower Tray (D637 Only)" in the Service Manual for the "2000/3000 (Booklet) Finisher".
  • Page 757 Main SP Tables-9 Staple Rotation Sensor 6139 8 Not home position Home position (Staple Rotation HP Sensor) Staple not 6139 9 Staple Sensor Staple detected detected Staple not 6139 10 Staple READY Detection Staple detected detected Exit Guide Plate HP 6139 11 Not home position Home position...

  • Page 758: Internal Shift Tray (D633)

    Main SP Tables-9 Internal Shift Tray (D633) Reading 6152 Description Tray position: Tray position: 6152 2 Shift: Position Sensor Front Rear 1 Bin Tray (D632) Reading 6154 Description 6154 1 1 bin: Set Detection Not set Paper not 6154 2 1 bin: Paper Sensor Paper detected detected D143/D144...
  • Page 759 Main SP Tables-9 Two-Tray PFU (D580)/ LCIT 2000 (D581)/ LCIT 1200 (D631) Reading 6160 Description Paper not 6160 1 Bank: Tray3: Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6160 2 Bank: Tray4: Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not 6160 3 Bank: Tray5: Feed Sensor Paper detected detected Paper not...

  • Page 760: Output Check Table

    Main SP Tables-9 5.10.2 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE Copier 5804 Display Description Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: High 5804 3 Drum/Dev Motor: K: HighSpeed Speed Drum/Development Drive Motor-K: 5804 4 Drum/Dev Motor: K: MiddleSpeed Middle Speed Drum/Development Drive Motor-M: Low 5804 5 Drum/Dev Motor: K: LowSpeed Speed Drum/Development Drive Motor- C: High 5804 10 Drum/Dev Motor: M: HighSpeed...
  • Page 761 Main SP Tables-9 5804 32 - See the last of this table. 5804 33 - See the last of this table. 5804 35 - See the last of this table. 5804 37 Toner Relay Motor Toner Transport Motor Image Transfer Motor: 5804 40 ITB Drive Motor: High Speed HighSpeed...
  • Page 762 Main SP Tables-9 Duplex Feed Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW: 5804 75 M:CCW:MiddleSpeed Middle Speed Duplex Feed Motor: CCW: Duplex/By-pass Motor: CCW: 5804 76 LowSpeed Low Speed Duplex Reverse 5804 81 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: High Speed M:CW:HighSpeed Duplex Reverse 5804 82 Duplex Inverter Motor: CW: Middle Speed M:CW:MiddleSpeed Duplex Reverse Motor: CW:...
  • Page 763 Main SP Tables-9 5804 112 Fusing Fan:H Fusing Fan: High Speed 5804 113 Fusing Fan:L Fusing Fan: Low Speed 5804 114 PSU Cooling Fan PSU Fan 1: High Speed 5804 115 2nd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 2: High Speed 5804 117 3rd Duct Fan: H Duct Fan 3: High Speed 5804 119 Paper Exit Fan:H...
  • Page 764 Main SP Tables-9 5804 144 Exit Junction Solenoid Junction Gate 1 Solenoid 5804 145 1st Feed Pickup Solenoid 1st Pickup Solenoid 5804 146 2st Feed Pickup Solenoid 2nd Pickup Solenoid 5804 161 PCL: Bk 5804 162 PCL: M 5804 163 PCL: C 5804 164 PCL: Y 5804 166 HST Sensor:Bk TD Sensor:Bk...
  • Page 765 Main SP Tables-9 5804 187 PP:Development:M 5804 188 PP:Development:C 5804 189 PP:Development:Y 5804 190 PP:Separation 5804 192 RFID ON/OFF: K 5804 193 RFID ON/OFF: Y 5804 194 RFID ON/OFF: C 5804 195 RFID ON/OFF: M 5804 196 RFID COM ON:K 5804 197 RFID COM ON: Y 5804 198 RFID COM ON: C 5804 199 RFID COM ON: M...
  • Page 766 Main SP Tables-9 5804 228 PP:PTR:+ PP: Paper Transfer Roller:+ 5804 229 PP:PTR:- PP: Paper Transfer Roller:- 5804 231 HVPS: ChargeDC: K 5804 232 HVPS: ChargeDC: M 5804 233 HVPS: ChargeDC: C 5804 234 HVPS: ChargeDC: Y 5804 237 PP:Charge AC:K:HighSpeed 5804 238 PP:Charge AC:K:MiddleSpeed 5804 239 HVPS: ChargeAC: K: LowSpeed...
  • Page 767 Main SP Tables-9 Fusing Exit Motor Note: These SP modes will be moved to Super SP mode in the near future. Important: Use the procedure below to do the output checks for the fusing exit motor. If you do not follow this procedure, a kink will form in the fusing belt sleeve, and the fusing sleeve belt unit will need to be replaced.
  • Page 768 Main SP Tables-9 ARDF (D630) 6008 Display Description 6008 1 Pick-Up Motor Forward 6008 2 Pick-Up Motor Reverse 6008 3 Feed Motor Forward Feed Motor-Forward rotation 6008 4 Feed Motor Reverse Feed Motor-Reverse rotation 6008 5 Relay Motor Forward Transport Motor- Forward rotation 6008 7 Inverter Motor Reverse Transport Motor- Forward rotation 6008 8 Inverter Motor Reverse...
  • Page 769 Main SP Tables-9 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) 6144 Display Description 6144 1 Relay Up Motor Upper Transport Motor 6144 2 Relay Down Motor Lower Transport Motor 6144 3 Exit Motor 6144 4 Proof Junction Gate SOL Tray Junction Gate Solenoid 6144 5 Tray Up Motor Lower Tray Lift Motor 6144 6 Jogger Motor Jogger Fence Motor...
  • Page 770 Main SP Tables-9 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636) 6145 Display Description 6145 1 Entrance Motor Finisher Entrance Motor 6145 2 Upper Feed Motor Upper Transport Motor 6145 3 Lower Feed Motor Lower Transport Motor 6145 4 Exit Motor Upper/Proof Tray Exit Motor 6145 5 Knock Roller Motor Clamp Roller Retraction Motor 6145 6 Shift Motor...
  • Page 771 Main SP Tables-9 Trailing Edge Fence Moving 6145 21 Fold Unit Bottom Fence Lift Motor Motor Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: 6145 22 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Front Front Saddle Stitch Staple Motor: 6145 23 Booklet Stapler EH185R: Rear Rear 6145 24 Folder Plate Motor Fold Plate Motor 6145 25 Folder Roller Motor Fold Roller Motor...

  • Page 772: Shift Tray (D633)

    Main SP Tables-9 Shift Tray (D633) 6153 Display Description 6153 1 Shift Tray: Motor 1 Bin Tray (D632) 6155 Display Description 6155 1 1 bin: Junction Solenoid Two-Tray PFU (D580)/ LCIT 2000 (D581)/ LCIT 1200 (D531) 6161 Display Description Feed Motor:High Speed 6161 5 Bank1: Feed Motor: HighSpeed (D537/D538) Bank1: Feed Motor:...
  • Page 773 Main SP Tables-9 6161 19 Bank2: Feed Motor: LowSpeed Feed Motor: Low Speed (D537) Bank2: Feed Motor: 6161 20 Feed Motor: Low Increase Speed (D537) LowIncreaseSpeed 6161 30 Bank:Tray3: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D537/ D538) 6161 31 Bank:Tray4: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D537/ D539) 6161 32 Bank:Tray5: PU Solenoid Pick-up Solenoid (D539)

  • Page 774: Printer Service Mode

    Main SP Tables-9 5.10.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE SP1-XXX (Service Mode) 1001 Bit Switch 001 Bit Switch 1 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable Enable: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will have no effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
  • Page 775 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 002 Bit Switch 2 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 Shift Normal Applying a collation Type Collate Collate A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have a ‘Collate Type’ configured. ...
  • Page 776 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 003 Bit Switch 3 bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 0: Disable 1: Enable [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility Enable: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000. In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be changed to "<ESC>*r1A"...
  • Page 777 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 004 Bit Switch 4 DFU bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 0: Disable 1: Enable IPDS print-side reversal If enabled, the simplex pages of IPDS jobs will be printed on the front side because of printing on the back side of the page.
  • Page 778 Main SP Tables-9 If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device can be configured to print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs. bit 2 bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria...
  • Page 779 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 007 Bit Switch 7 Print path 0: Disable 1: Enable If enabled, simplex pages (in mixed simplex/duplex PS/PCL5 jobs only) bit 0 and the last page of an odd paged duplex job (PS, PCL5, PCL6), are always routed through the duplex unit.
  • Page 780 Main SP Tables-9 1001 Bit Switch 005 Bit Switch 9 PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs "Disabled "Enabled submitted via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE (Immediately)" (10 seconds)" 1284). bit 0 To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection doesn't necessarily mean that the job can't be printed.
  • Page 781 Main SP Tables-9 1003 [Clear Setting] Initialize Printer System 1003 1 Initializes settings in the "System" menu of the user mode. 1003 3 Delete Program 1004 [Print Summary] Print Summary 1004 1 Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings). 1005 [Display Version] Disp.
  • Page 782 Main SP Tables-9 [Resolution Setting] 1102 Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. 2400x600 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 2400x600 Text, 1102 1 1800x600, Text, 600x600 Text [Test Page] 1103 Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gamma adjustment.
  • Page 783 Main SP Tables-9 1104 62 Yellow: Shadow 1104 63 Yellow: Middle 1104 64 Yellow: IDmax [Save Tone Control Value] Stores the print gamma adjusted with the "Gamma Adj." menu item as the 1105 current setting. Before the machine stores the new "current setting", it moves the data currently stored as the "current setting"...

  • Page 784: Scanner Sp Mode

    Main SP Tables-9 5.10.4 SCANNER SP MODE SP1-xxx (System and Others) [Compression Type] 1004 Selects the compression type for binary picture processing. [1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step ] 1004 1 Compression Type *CTL 1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR [Erase Margin(Remote scan)] Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
  • Page 785 Main SP Tables-9 SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) [Compression Level (Gray-scale)] 2021 Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the three settings that can be selected at the operation panel. 2021 1 Comp1:5-95 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ] 2021 2 Comp2:5-95 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ] 2021 3 Comp3:5-95...

  • Page 786: Firmware Update

    Firmware Update 5.11 FIRMWARE UPDATE To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into SD Card Slot 2 on the left rear side of the controller box.

  • Page 787: Before You Begin

    Firmware Update The RCPS firmware is required for the XPS driver even though the RPCS driver is not used for this model. 5.11.2 BEFORE YOU BEGIN An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions when you handle SD cards: ...

  • Page 788: Updating Firmware

    Firmware Update 5.11.3 UPDATING FIRMWARE Preparation If the SD card is blank, copy the entire "romdata" folder onto the SD card. If the card already contains the "romdata" folder, copy the "D144" folder onto the card. If the card already contains folders up to "D144", copy the necessary firmware files (e.g. D144xxxx.fwu) into this folder.

  • Page 789: Firmware Update Error

    Firmware Update  Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time. It is recommended to update firmware modules one by one. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or ) to start the update.  The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch "OpPanel".

  • Page 790: Recovery After Power Loss

    Firmware Update Recovery after Power Loss If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated successfully.

  • Page 791: Update Procedure For App2Me Provider

    Firmware Update 5.11.5 UPDATE PROCEDURE FOR APP2ME PROVIDER Follow this procedure to update App2Me if a new version is available. Push the [User/Tools] key on the operation panel. If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, Step 3 and Step 4 are required. Otherwise, skip to step 5.

  • Page 792: Browser Unit Update Procedure

    Firmware Update  App2Me and all other running applications on the VM card must be shut down before removing the VM card in order to update the firmware, back up NVRAM, install the browser unit, or execute application move or undo with SP5873. ...

  • Page 793: Handling Firmware Update Errors

    Firmware Update  Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.  Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch.  Remove the SD card of the browser unit from SD card slot 2 (lower).  Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk"...
  • Page 794 Firmware Update Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct module is not on the SD data (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install card) again. Module mismatch – Module SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD on SD card is not for this card is for another machine.

  • Page 795: Installing Another Language

    Installing Another Language 5.12 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages at a time. Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You can select both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operation panel.
  • Page 796 Installing Another Language Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.  If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.  Touching "Exit (0)"...
  • Page 797 Installing Another Language 10. Touch "Update(#)" on the screen (or press ) to start the download. Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is downloading. The following occur at the time the language is downloading: ...

  • Page 798: Reboot/System Setting Reset

    Reboot/System Setting Reset 5.13 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET 5.13.1 SOFTWARE RESET You can reboot the software with one of the following two procedures:  Turn the main power switch off and on.  Press and hold down together for over 10 seconds. When the machine beeps once, release both buttons.

  • Page 799: Copier Setting Reset

    Reboot/System Setting Reset Copier Setting Reset Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to their defaults.  Press User Tools/Counter  Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.  You must press first. ...

  • Page 800: Downloading Stamp Data

    Downloading Stamp Data 5.14 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the hard disks at the following times:  After the hard disks have been replaced. The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download the fixed stamp data required by the hard disks.

  • Page 801: Nvram Data Upload/Download

    NVRAM Data Upload/Download 5.15 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD 5.15.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.  This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced. ...

  • Page 802: Downloading An Sd Card To Nvram

    NVRAM Data Upload/Download 5.15.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.  The NVRAM data down load may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between the controller and BCU is defective.

  • Page 803: Address Book Upload/Download

    Address Book Upload/Download 5.16 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD 5.16.1 INFORMATION LIST The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded. Information  Registration No.  Select Title  User Code  Folder  E-mail  Local Authentication  Protection Code ...
  • Page 804 Address Book Upload/Download 5.16.3 UPLOAD  Turn off the main power switch of the main machine.  Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine ( x 1).  Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2. ...

  • Page 805: Using The Debug Log

    Using the Debug Log 5.17 USING THE DEBUG LOG 5.17.1 OVERVIEW This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis. Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. But this information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.

  • Page 806: Switching On And Setting Up Save Debug Log

    Using the Debug Log 5.17.2 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG The debug information cannot be saved until the “Save Debug Log” function has been switched on and a target has been selected.  Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on. Enter the SP mode.
  • Page 807 Using the Debug Log  Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SD card if it is inserted in the service slot.  Now touch “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.
  • Page 808 Using the Debug Log For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables in Section 4. “Troubleshooting”.  Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debug information. Touch “5859”. Under “5859” press the necessary key item for the module that you want to record. Enter the appropriate 4-digit number.
  • Page 809 Using the Debug Log 2224 (IPU) 4126 (DCS) 2000 (NCS)  The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”). Key to Acronyms Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning Engine Control Service Net File Application GW Print Service Printer Design Language GW Print Service –...

  • Page 810: Retrieving The Debug Log From The Hdd

    SD card.  Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricoh representative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if you want.
  • Page 811 Using the Debug Log SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not a completely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS key number and other non-volatile information.

  • Page 812: Card Save Function

    Card Save Function 5.18 CARD SAVE FUNCTION 5.18.1 OVERVIEW Card Save:  The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
  • Page 813 Card Save Function 5.18.2 PROCEDURE  Turn the main power switch OFF.  Insert the SD card into slot 2. Then turn the power ON.  Enter SP mode.  Select the “Printer Sp”.  Select SP-1001 "Bit Switch”.  Select “Bit Switch 1 Settings”...
  • Page 814 Card Save Function  Card Save (Add) and Card Save (New) should be displayed on the screen. Select Card Save (Add) or Card Save (New).  Press “OK” and then exit the “User Tools/Counter” menu.  Press the “Printer” button. D143/D144 5-446 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 815 Card Save Function  Card Save should be displayed in the top left of the display panel.  Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking as shown below.  As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print output.

  • Page 816: Error Messages

    Card Save Function  Press “Offline” and then the “Clear” button to exit Card Save mode.  Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press the “#” button in the numeric keypad to register the changes.  Remove the SD card after the main power switch is turned off.

  • Page 817: Smc List Card Save Function

    SMC List Card Save Function 5.19 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION 5.19.1 OVERVIEW SMC List Card Save  The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to the SD-card inserted into the operation panel SD-card slot. 5.19.2 PROCEDURE Turn the main power switch OFF.
  • Page 818 SMC List Card Save Function Detail No. SMC Categories to Save 008 Capture Log 021 Copier User Program 022 Scanner SP 023 Scanner User Program 024 SDK/J Summary 025 SDK/J Application Info 026 Printer SP Press [EXECUTE]. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving. “It is executing it”...

  • Page 819: File Names Of The Saved Smc Lists

    SMC List Card Save Function 10. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.  The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.  Press [CANCEL] to abort executing. 11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode. 5.19.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS The SMC list data saved on the SD-card will be named automatically.
  • Page 820 SMC List Card Save Function File creation time Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.) File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value) This part is fixed. A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this function is executed.

  • Page 821: Troubleshooting

    TROUBLESHOOTING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 822 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 823: Service Call Conditions

    Service Call 6. TROUBLESHOOTING 6.1 SERVICE CALL 6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS The "SC Table" section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter (not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.

  • Page 824: Sc Code Classification

    Service Call After you turn the main power switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the main power switch on (See SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004) in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters when the SC code is detected. If the problem concerns electrical circuit boards, first disconnect then reconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs.
  • Page 825 Service Call Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section 460 - Unit 480 - Others 500 - Paper feed Paper feed / Fusing 515 - Duplex 520 - Paper transport 530 - Fan motor 540 - Fusing Paper feed / Fusing 560 - Others 570 -...

  • Page 826: Service Call Tables

    Service Call 900 - Counter Others 920 - Memory 990 - Others 6.1.2 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 1 SC1xx: Scanning Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Exposure lamp error The peak white level is less than 64/255 digits (8 bits) when scanning the shading plate.
  • Page 827 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Scanner home position error 1 The scanner home position sensor does not detect the "OFF" condition during operation.  Scanner motor driver defective  Scanner motor defective  Harness between SIO board and scanner motor disconnected ...
  • Page 828 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Black level detection error The black level cannot be adjusted within the target value during the zero clamp.  Harness disconnected  Defective SBU  Check the cable connection  Replace the SBU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) White level detection error...
  • Page 829 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SBU communication error The SBU connection cannot be detected at power on or recovery from the energy save mode. Defective SBU Defective harness Defective detection port on the BCU  Replace the harness. ...
  • Page 830 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Copy Data Security Unit error The copy data security board is not detected when the copy data security function is set "ON" with the initial setting. A device check error occurs when the copy data security function is set "ON"...
  • Page 831 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) CIS LED error LED on the CIS causes an error.  During initializing, the ratio of the average between leading-edge area and rear-edge is out of range.  During scanning, the shading data peak is under the standard value.
  • Page 832 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) CIS white level error The shading data peak detected from the CIS is abnormal.  Defective CIS Check or replace the harness (CN220 or CN210 on the DF main board) between the CIS and DF. Replace the CIS on the DF.
  • Page 833 Service Call 6.1.3 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 2 SC 2xx: Exposure Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Polygon motor error 1: ON timeout The polygon mirror motor does not reach the targeted operating speed within the specified time after turning on or changing speed. ...
  • Page 834 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Polygon motor error 3: XSCRDY signal error The SCRDY_N signal goes HIGH (inactive) while the laser diode is firing.  Disconnected or defective harness to polygon motor driver board  Defective polygon motor ...
  • Page 835 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [K]: LD1 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [C]: LD1 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [M]: LD1 Laser synchronizing detection error: start position [Y]: LD1 The laser synchronizing detection signal for the start position of the LDB [K], [C], [M], [Y] is not output for two seconds after LDB unit turns on while the polygon motor is rotating normally.
  • Page 836 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Disconnected cable from the laser synchronizing detection unit or defective connection Defective laser synchronizing detector Defective LDB Defective IPU  Check the connectors.  Replace the laser-synchronizing detector.  Replace the LDB. ...
  • Page 837 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) FGATE OFF error: K FGATE OFF error: C FGATE OFF error: M FGATE OFF error: Y The PFGATE ON signal still asserts within 5 seconds after processing the image in normal job or MUSIC for end position [K], [C], [M], [Y].
  • Page 838 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) GAVD communication error The 12C bus device ID is not identified during initialization. A device-status error occurs during 12C bus communication. The 12C bus communication is not established due to an error other than a buffer shortage.

  • Page 839: Sc3Xx: Image Processing

    Service Call 6.1.4 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 3 SC3xx: Image Processing – 1 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Charge P.P. output error: K Charge P.P. output error: C Charge P.P. output error: M Charge P.P. output error: Y The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.3 V or less for 0.2 seconds after the charge AC has been turned on.
  • Page 840 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)  Heat seal not removed from a new developer pack  TD harness sensor disconnected, loose or defective  TD sensor defective  Harness between TD sensor and drawer disconnected, defective Remove the heat seal from each PCDU.
  • Page 841 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: K TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: C TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: M TD sensor (Vt low) error 2: Y The Vt value of the black, magenta, cyan, or yellow TD sensor is below the specified value with SP3-020-004 (default: 0.5V) for 10 counts.
  • Page 842 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ID sensor adjustment error When the Vsg error counter reaches "3", the machine detects "SC370". The Vsg error counter counts "1" when the Vsg detected by ID sensor is more than the value (default: 4.5V) specified with SP3-324-005 or less than the value (default: 3.5V) specified with SP3-324-006.
  • Page 843 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Drum/Development motor error: K Drum/Development motor error: C Drum/Development motor error: M Drum/Development motor error: Y The machine detects a High signal from the drum/development motor for 2 seconds after the drum/development motor turned on. ...

  • Page 844: Sc4Xx: Image Processing

    Service Call 6.1.5 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 4 SC4xx: Image Processing - 3 Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Image transfer unit motor error The motor LOCK signal is not detected for more than two seconds while the motor START signal is on. ...
  • Page 845 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Image transfer unit error The machine detects the encoder sensor error.  Defective encoder sensor  Image transfer unit installation error  Defective image transfer unit motor Check if the image transfer unit is correctly set. Replace the image transfer unit motor.
  • Page 846 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Separation power pack output error An interrupt checks the status of the power pack every 20 ms. This SC is issued if the BCU detects a short in the power pack 10 times at D(ac). ...
  • Page 847 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) High voltage power: Drum / development bias output error An error signal is detected for 0.2 seconds when charging the drum or development. High voltage leak Broken harness Defective drum unit or development unit Defective high voltage supply unit ...
  • Page 848 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Temperature sensor error The thermistor output of the temperature sensor was not within the prescribed range (more than 0.5 V to less than 3.0 V). -----  Turn the power switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Temperature and humidity sensor error 2...

  • Page 849: Sc5Xx: Paper Feed And Fusing

    Service Call 6.1.6 SERVICE CALL TABLES – 5 SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper Tray 1 error Paper Tray 2 error When the tray lift motor rotates counterclockwise, (if the upper limit is not detected within 10 seconds), the machine asks the user to reset the tray.
  • Page 850 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tray 3 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT) This SC is generated if the following condition occurs. For the paper feed unit: When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 15 seconds For the LCT: The upper or lower limit is not detected within 8 seconds when the tray...
  • Page 851 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tray 4 error (Paper Feed Unit or LCT) This SC is generated if the following condition occurs. For the two-tray paper feed unit When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 15 seconds.
  • Page 852 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tray 5 error (Optional Paper Feed Unit or LCT) This SC is generated if the following condition occurs. For the two-tray paper feed unit When the tray lift motor is turned on, the upper limit is not detected within 15 seconds.
  • Page 853 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Registration motor error Paper feed motor error The IOB does not receive the lock signal.  Motor overload  Defective registration motor  Disconnected or broken harness  Defective IOB Check the cable connection. Replace the harness.
  • Page 854 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) QSU fan error The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the QSU fan turns on.  Disconnected harness  Overload on the QSU fan motor ...
  • Page 855 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Second duct fan error 1 Second duct fan error 2 The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the second duct fan turns on.  Disconnected harness ...
  • Page 856 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper exit fan error The machine does not detect the fan motor lock signal for 100 ms while the paper exit fan turns on. Disconnected harness Overload on the paper exit fan motor Defective paper exit motor Defective IOB ...
  • Page 857 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing/Paper exit motor error The IOB does not receive the lock signal 100 ms after turning on the fusing/paper exit motor. Motor overload Defective fusing/paper exit motor Shorted +24V fuse on the PSU ...
  • Page 858 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller warm-up error 1  The heating roller temperature does not reach 80°C for 20 seconds after the inverter turned on.  The center temperature of the heating roller does not reach the ready temperature for 90 seconds after the fusing lamp turned on.
  • Page 859 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller overheat: Center (hardware error) During stand-by mode or a print job, the detected heating roller temperature reaches 220°C. Defective AC controller board Defective IOB Defective IPU Defective fusing control system Related SC code: SC 543 ...
  • Page 860 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross error  The zero cross signal is detected three times even though the heater relay is off when turning on the main power.  The zero cross signal is not detected for 3 seconds even though the heater relay is on after turning on the main power or closing the front door.
  • Page 861 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller thermistor error The temperature at the end of the heating roller measured by the heating roller thermistor does not reach 0°C for 7 seconds. Loose connection of pressure roller thermistor Defective heating roller thermistor Related SC code: SC 541 ...
  • Page 862 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Heating roller overheat: End (software error) The detected heating roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1 second for 10 consecutive times. Defective AC controller board Defective IOB Defective IPU Related SC code: SC 543 ...
  • Page 863 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fusing Heater error: End The fusing heater keeps full power for 19 seconds or more. Defective thermistors Disconnected cables  Replace the thermistors.  Check and replace the cables. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Zero cross frequency error When the zero cross signal is 66 or more and it is detected 10 times or more in 11 detections, the machine determines that input 60 Hz and...
  • Page 864 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller thermistor error: End The temperature at the end of the pressure roller measured by the thermistor does not reach 0°C for 37 seconds.  Loose connection of the thermistor ...
  • Page 865 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller overheat: End (software error) The detected pressure roller temperature stays at 215°C or more for 1 second for 10 consecutive times.  Defective AC control board  Defective IOB ...
  • Page 866 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller contact sensor error Pressure roller contact sensor does not detect the pressure roller position three times.  Broken or defective pressure roller contact sensor  Deformed or broken pressure roller contact sensor feeler ...
  • Page 867 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller thermistor error: Center The center temperature of the pressure roller measured by the thermistor does not reach 0°C for 37 seconds.  Loose connection of the thermistor  Defective thermistor Check if the thermistor is firmly connected.
  • Page 868 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Pressure roller overheat : Center (hardware error) The thermistor detects 220°C or more.  Defective IOB  Defective IPU  Defective fusing control system  Replace the IOB.  Replace the IPU. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) NC sensor broken: Center...

  • Page 869: Service Call Tables

    Service Call 6.1.7 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 6 SC6xx: Device Communication Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Mechanical counter error: K This SC is only for NA models. The machine detects the mechanical counter error when SP5-987-001 is set to "1 (ON)". ...
  • Page 870 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher communication error Paper tray unit communication error While the IOB communicates with an optional unit, an SC code is displayed if one of following conditions occurs.  The IOB receives the break signal which is generated by the peripherals only just after the main switch is turned on.
  • Page 871 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 1 After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier control board is disconnected or damaged.
  • Page 872 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 3 A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.  Counter device control board defective  Backup battery of counter device defective Replace the counter device. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Counter device error 4...
  • Page 873 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Install the expanded authentication module. Install the SD card. Install the DESS module. Set the super service SP as follows and turn the main switch off and on. 1. User limitation: Set SP5-401-160 (expanded authentication management setting) to 0.
  • Page 874 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Tracking information notice error Ttracking application error Tracking information is lost. The machine failed to give notice of the tracking information to the -001 tracking SDK application. Tracking information is lost, and the machine cannot count correctly. Turn the main switch off and on.
  • Page 875 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Communication error: Engine -> Controller (No response) No response from engine to frame after frame sending from controller with RAPI protocol. (No response after 3 attempts of sending every 100 Asserts the error detected by the serial driver from PSC module to SRM with RAPI command.
  • Page 876 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem setting. Same as -01  Check and set the correct AT command (SP5-816-160). Communication line error The supplied voltage is not sufficient due to the defective communication line or defective connection.
  • Page 877 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Incorrect dial up connection Chat program parameter error Chat program execution error An unexpected error occurs when the modem (Cumin-M) tries to call the center with a dial up connection.  Caused by a software bug No action required because this SC does not interfere with operation of the machine.
  • Page 878 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) EEPROM communication error Retry of EEPROM communication fails three times after the machine has detected the EEPROM error.  Caused by noise Turn the main power switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Engine start up error The BCU fails to respond within the prescribed time when the machine...
  • Page 879 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)  Controller stalled  Controller board installed incorrectly  Controller board defective  Operation panel connector loose or defective  The controller is not completely shut down when the main switch is turned off.
  • Page 880 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Memory chip at TD sensor: Communication error Retry of memory chip communication fails three times after the machine has detected the memory chip communication error.  Damaged memory chip data  Disconnected inter face ...

  • Page 881: Sc7Xx: Peripherals

    Service Call 6.1.8 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 7 SC7xx: Peripherals Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) ADF original table lift malfunction One of the following conditions was detected.  The bottom plate position sensor does not activate when the bottom plate motor lifts the original table.
  • Page 882 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Original pick-up HP error When the pick-up motor turns on clockwise, the original pick-up HP sensor does not detect the home position of the original calling.  Defective original pick-up HP sensor ...
  • Page 883 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) DF fan error DF fan motor lock signal is detected after original transportation has finished.  DF fan motor dirty  Disconnected or broken harnesses  Defective DF fan motor  Clean the DF fan motor.
  • Page 884 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher exit guide plate motor error After moving away from the guide plate position sensor, the exit guide is not detected at the home position within the prescribed time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 885 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher jogger motor error The jogger fences move out of the home position but the HP sensor output does not change within the specified number of pulses. The 1st failure issues an original jam message, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 886 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Check the connections and cables for the components mentioned above. Check for blockages in the stack feed-out motor mechanism. Replace the stack feed-out HP sensor and/or stack feed-out motor. Replace the finisher main board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher stapler movement motor error...
  • Page 887 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher corner stapler rotation motor error The stapler does not return to its home position within the specified time after stapling. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 888 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher folder plate motor error The folder plate moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 889 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Clamp roller retraction motor error The clamp roller retraction motor moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code.
  • Page 890 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Booklet stapler motor error 1 The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. For the 2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher The front stapler unit saddle-stitch motor does not start operation within the specified time.
  • Page 891 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) 1000/2000/3000-sheet (booklet) finisher: Tray lift motor error The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. The upper tray paper height sensor does not change its status with the specified time after the tray raises or lowers.
  • Page 892 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Stacking sponge roller motor Occurs during the operation of the stacking sponge roller motor.  Disconnected, looser or defective motor harness  Motor overloaded  Disconnected, loose or defective sensor harness ...
  • Page 893 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Paper position sensor slide motor error The paper position sensor moves but is not detected at the home position within the specified time. The 1st detection failure issues a jam error, and the 2nd failure issues this SC code. ...
  • Page 894 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Shift motor error The shift motor HP sensor does not detect any change for 1.86 seconds after the shift motor has turned on at power on or during its operation. Defective shift motor Defective shift motor HP sensor Check the connections to the shift motor and the shift motor HP sensor.
  • Page 895 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Finisher error The machine does not recognize the finisher, but recognizes the bridge unit.  Defective connector  Defective harness  Incorrect installation  Check the connections between the finisher and the machine. ...

  • Page 896: Service Call Tables

    Service Call 6.1.9 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 8 SC8xx: Overall System Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Energy saving I/O sub-system error The energy saving I/O sub-system detects an error. Controller board defective Replace the controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Monitor error This is a file detection and electronic file signature check error when the boot loader attempts to read the self-diagnostic module, system kernel,...
  • Page 897 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Fatal kernel error Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the operation panel. [0x5032] “0x455252nn” -> HAIC-P2 error [0x5245] “0x53554D45”...
  • Page 898 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics error: ASIC ASIC register check error The write-&-verify check has occurred in the ASIC. [0B00] Defective ASIC device  Replace the controller board. ASIC detection error The I/O ASIC for system control is not detected. [0B06] Defective ASIC Defective North Bridge and PCII/F...
  • Page 899 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)  Defective HDD device Replace or remove the HDD device. HDD timeout (First machine) HDD device busy for over 31 seconds. Mandolin is not detected. After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for over 6 seconds.
  • Page 900 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics error: NIC MAC address check sum error The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum stored in ROM. [6101]  Defective SEEP ROM  Defective I2C bus (connection) ...
  • Page 901 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostics error: NVRAM (resident) NVRAM verify error NVRAM device does not exist or NVRAM device is damaged.  No NVRAM device [1401]  Destructive NVRAM device  NVRAM backup battery exhausted ...
  • Page 902 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error: Optional memory An error occurs after write/verify check for optional RAM on the engine I/F board (mother board). [5101] Defective memory device Replace the Engine I/F board (mother board). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Self-diagnostic error: Clock generator...
  • Page 903 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) EEPROM read error Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM. Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason. Turn the main switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Nand-Flash updating verification error...
  • Page 904 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Bluetooth device connection error (The Bluetooth interface unit was installed while the machine was turned on.) The Bluetooth interface unit was installed while the machine was turned Turn off the main power switch, and then confirm that the Bluetooth interface unit was installed correctly.
  • Page 905 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Data encryption conversion error A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key. Encryption key acquisition error: The controller fails to get a new encryption key.  Defective controller board ...
  • Page 906 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD data encryption error Encryption of data on the hard disk failed. HDD check error: The HDD is not correctly installed.  No HDD installed  Unformatted HDD  The encryption key on the controller is different from the one on the HDD Install the HDD correctly.
  • Page 907 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD startup error at main power on HDD is connected but a driver error is detected. The driver does not respond with the HDD within 30 seconds.  HDD not initialized ...
  • Page 908 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: Read error The data stored in the HDD cannot be read correctly. Defective HDD Defective controller  Replace the HDD.  Replace the controller. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD: CRC error While reading data from the HDD or storing data in the HDD, data transmission fails.
  • Page 909 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card error The SD card is ejected from the slot. Install the SD card. Turn the main switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) SD card access error An error occurs while an SD card is used.
  • Page 910 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Address book error Address book data stored on the hard disk was detected as abnormal when it was accessed from either the operation panel or the network.  Defective software program ...
  • Page 911 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD mail transfer error An error is detected in the HDD at machine initialization.  Defective HDD  Power failure during an access to the HDD Initialize the HDD partition (SP5-832-008). Replace the HDD.
  • Page 912 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Log Data Error An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating. Log Data Error 1 ...
  • Page 913 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) HDD Data Overwrite Security SD card error The 'all delete' function cannot be executed but the Data Overwrite Security Unit (D377) is installed and activated. Defective SD card SD card not installed Replace the NVRAM and then install the new SD card.
  • Page 914 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Error data in an authentication application reaches the management limit. Turn the main power switch off and on. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Software performance error If the processing program shows abnormal performance and the program is abnormally ended, this SC is issued.

  • Page 915: Sc9Xx: Miscellaneous

    Service Call 6.1.10 SERVICE CALL TABLES - 9 SC9xx: Miscellaneous Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Electric counter error The total count contains something that is not a number. NVRAM incorrect type Defective NVRAM NVRAM data scrambled Unexpected error from external source ...
  • Page 916 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) External Controller Error 6 Egrt board error The external controller alerted the machine about an error.  Replace the Egret controller board. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) External Controller down While EAC (External Application Converter), the conversion module, was operating normally, the receipt of a power line interrupt signal from the FLUTE serial driver was detected, or BREAK signal from the other...
  • Page 917 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Defective software Unexpected hardware resource (e.g., memory shortage)  Software defective; turning on and off the main power switch  Insufficient memory; additional memory Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Printer font error A necessary font is not found when starting up the printer application.
  • Page 918 Service Call Display Meaning (-1) HDD not connected (-2) HDD not ready (-3) No label (-4) Partition type incorrect (-5) Error returned during label read or check (-6) Error returned during label read or check (-7) "filesystem" repair failed (-8) "filesystem"...
  • Page 919 Service Call be configured again (this will use a lot of time). Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5832-011, do these steps:  Go into the User Tools mode and do "Delivery Settings" to print all received fax documents that are scheduled for delivery.
  • Page 920 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)  This SC is not displayed on the LCD (logging only). Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Undefined error Defective software program An error undetectable by any other SC code occurred ...
  • Page 921 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Incorrect type controller installed Defective controller Replace the controller with the correct type. Incorrect model controller installed. Replace the controller with the correct model. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Application function selection error The application selected by the operation panel key works abnormally (No response, abnormal ending).
  • Page 922 Service Call Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures) Application start error No applications start within a specified time after the power is turned  Loose connection of RAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM  Defective controller  Software problem Check the setting of SP5-875-001. If the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it to "0 (ON)".

  • Page 923: Process Control Error Conditions

    Process Control Error Conditions 6.2 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS 6.2.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT SP-3-014-001 (Developer Initialization Result) Result Description Possible Causes/Action Developer Successfully initialization is completed successfully completed. A cover was opened or the main switch was turned off during the initialization.

  • Page 924: Process Control Self-Check Result

    Process Control Error Conditions Result Description Possible Causes/Action  Make sure that the heat seal on the development unit is not removed  Vcnt error 3 Vcnt is less than 4.7V. Defective TD sensor  Vt target settings are not correct. ...
  • Page 925 Process Control Error Conditions No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action  Solid image is not sufficient density:  Retry the process control.  Replace the ID sensors.  ID sensor Replace the IOB board.  coefficient Not enough data can Solid image is O.K. ...

  • Page 926: Vsg Adjustment Result

    Process Control Error Conditions No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action  Sampling data ID sensor pattern density is too high Not enough data can error during or low. be sampled during the  gamma Hardware defective gamma correction. correction Same as 53 ...
  • Page 927 Process Control Error Conditions No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action  Defective ID sensor ID sensor output  Poor connection is more than  Defective IOB ID sensor "Voffset output error Replace the ID sensor. Threshold" Check the connection. (SP3-324-004) Replace the IOB board. Vsg adjustment ...

  • Page 928: Line Position Adjustment Result

    Process Control Error Conditions 6.2.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y) This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which color has an error (M, Y or C). Result Description Note...

  • Page 929: Troubleshooting Guide

    Troubleshooting Guide 6.3 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 6.3.1 IMAGE QUALITY The following work-flow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the image quality problems on this product. 6-107 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 930 Troubleshooting Guide D143/D144 6-108 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 931: Line Position Adjustment

    Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as follows. Use A3/DLT size paper for this adjustment. Test  Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment).  Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0: Completed successfully, 1: Not completed).

  • Page 932: Countermeasure List For Color Registration Errors

    Troubleshooting Guide Countermeasure list for color registration errors After Executing SP2-111-003  Result: "1" in SP2-194-007  Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Defective laser optics housing unit shutter Defective image processing unit Low density of test pattern Defective IPU...
  • Page 933 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure  The main scan registrations of Y, Defective laser optics housing unit  M, C are shifted by more than Defective IPU  ±15 mm from the main scan Replace the laser optics housing unit. ...
  • Page 934 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Do SP2-111-001 or -002. After Executing SP2-111-001 Result: "1" in SP2-194-007 Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure  White image, Abnormal image, Defective laser optics housing unit shutter ...
  • Page 935 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Low image density on the output Low pattern density Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx).  The main scan registrations of Y, No defective component  M, C are shifted by more than Defective laser optics housing unit ...
  • Page 936 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Others Skew correction upper limit error Defective IPU Defective laser optics housing unit  Replace the IPU.  Replace the laser optics housing unit. After Executing SP2-111-001 Result: "0" in SP2-194-007 Result: No color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012 Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure ...
  • Page 937 Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure Low image density on the output Low pattern density Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply some toner (SP3-015-xxx). The main scan registration is Defective ID sensor at center shifted, but only at the central Deformed center area on the image transfer belt area of the image on the output.

  • Page 938: Stain On The Outputs

    Troubleshooting Guide Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure  The sub scan lines are shifted. Defective PCDU  Shifted lines appear cyclically. Defective drive unit  Drum phase adjustment error  Do SP1-902-001 (Drum phase adjustment); see Replacement and Adjustment – Drive Unit – Gear Unit for details.

  • Page 939: Stack Problem In The 1-Bin Tray

    Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.4 STACK PROBLEM IN THE 1-BIN TRAY If a stack problem occurs on the 1-bin tray, raise the guide on the 1-bin tray. If a stack problem occurs;  Push the guide to lift the guide [A]. If another type or size of paper is used; Press down the guide [B].

  • Page 940: Problem At Regular Intervals

    Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.5 PROBLEM AT REGULAR INTERVALS Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of certain components. The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals). [A]: Paper feed direction [B]: Problems at regular intervals ...
  • Page 941 Troubleshooting Guide Flow Chart for the Toner End Recovery Error 6-119 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 942: Toner Bottle Detection Error

    Troubleshooting Guide Countermeasure 1  Check if the toner supply tube is bent or disconnected.  Straighten the toner supply tube or connect it correctly. Countermeasure 2  Remove the target color toner bottle.  Disconnect the toner supply tube from the toner pump unit. ...

  • Page 943: Solid Image Or Halftone Image Error

    Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.8 SOLID IMAGE OR HALFTONE IMAGE ERROR The toner density of a solid image or halftone image may not be uniform ([A]: problem output, [B]: normal output) if a large amount of sheets is printed at low coverage. If this occurs, follow the countermeasure below.

  • Page 944: Troubleshooting Guide

    Troubleshooting Guide Problem Prevention Procedure  Set the setting of SP3-516-025 (Refresh Mode; Job End Area Coefficient) to "0.5". 6.3.9 FAULTY CLEANING Black or color lines (2-3mm) Possible Cause: Wear of the cleaning blade at a specific point by image creation in the same place many times. Solution: Replace the drum unit.

  • Page 945: Encryption Key Restoration For Nvram

    Troubleshooting Guide Possible Cause: Developer wear with time Solution: Replace the developer or the development unit. 6.3.10 ENCRYPTION KEY RESTORATION FOR NVRAM How to restore the old encryption key to the machine The following message appears after the controller board is replaced, or after the hard disk and controller board are replaced.

  • Page 946: How To Do A Forced Start Up With No Encryption Key

    Troubleshooting Guide  The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on the controller board.  Turn off the main power switch when the machine has returned to normal status.  Remove the SD card from Slot 2. How to do a forced start up with no encryption key If the encryption key back-up has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.

  • Page 947: Fax Icon Is Not Displayed

    Troubleshooting Guide 6.3.11 FAX ICON IS NOT DISPLAYED When the fax unit is installed on the machine, the fax icon [A] is displayed on the home screen of the operation panel, as shown below. (The figure shown below is an example of the home screen. The location of each icon depends on the settings.) If the fax icon is not displayed (as shown below), the FCU should be replaced.

  • Page 948: Flowchart For The Error

    Troubleshooting Guide Flowchart for the error Test the machine using the flow chart below, to determine which parts are causing the problem. D143/D144 6-126 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 949: Countermeasure List For The Error

    Troubleshooting Guide Countermeasure list for the error The following table shows what to do in each case: For example, if only the controller and HDD were found to be defective, then it is No 4 in the table below. HDD Encryption OFF NVRAM Action Card...
  • Page 950 Troubleshooting Guide HDD Encryption ON NVRAM Action Card Replace CTL / HDD/SD card / NVRAM. Replace CTL / HDD/SD card / NVRAM. Replace CTL / HDD/SD card. Replace CTL / HDD. Replace CTL / SD Card/NVRAM, then the HDD is automatically formatted. Replace CTL / SD Card/NVRAM, then the HDD is automatically formatted.

  • Page 951: Jam Detection

    Jam Detection 6.4 JAM DETECTION 6.4.1 PAPER JAM DISPLAY SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.  CODE: Indicates the jam code.  SIZE: Indicates the paper Size Code.  TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).  DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred. 6.4.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES SP7-504 shows how many jams occurred at each location.
  • Page 952 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Vertical transport sensor 3 or relay 7504 13 Bank Transport 3 sensor does not detect paper from tray 3 (LCT). Vertical transport sensor 4 or relay 7504 14 Bank Transport 4 sensor does not detect paper from tray 4 (LCT).
  • Page 953 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Duplex entrance sensor does not detect Duplex Entrance: ON 7504 27 paper again after paper has passed this (Out) sensor. 7504 28 Vertical transport sensor 1 does not turn 7504 51 SEF Sensor 1 off.
  • Page 954 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Duplex Entrance: OFF Duplex entrance sensor does not turn 7504 66 (In) off. Duplex Entrance: OFF Duplex entrance sensor does not turn 7504 67 (Out) off after paper has passed this sensor. 7504 68 Finisher Entrance Paper does not reach to the entrance 7504 100...
  • Page 955 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Shift roller HP sensor does not turn off after the shift roller has moved from its Finisher Shift Motor home position. 7504 107 R1-R2 (D588) Shift roller HP sensor does not turn on after the shift roller has returned to its home position.
  • Page 956 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Upper tray exit sensor does not turn on while the stack feed-out belt is turned Finisher Exit: EUP 7504 195 R8-R12 (D637/D636) Upper tray exit sensor does not turn off after the stack feed-out belt has returned to its home position.
  • Page 957 Jam Detection Jam Code Display Description Display Shift roller HP sensor does not turn on/off after the shift roller motor has turned on. Exit guide plate HP sensor does not turn Finisher Shift Motor: 7504 201 on/off after the exit guide plate motor R1-R4 EUP (D637/D636) has turned on.

  • Page 958: Paper Size Code

    Jam Detection 7504 205 Punch encoder sensor does not turn on/off after the punch drive motor has turned on. Punch movement HP sensor does not Finisher Punch Motor: 7504 206 turn on/off after the punch movement R1-R4 EUP (D637/D636) motor has turned on. Paper position slide HP sensor does not turn on/off after the paper position sensor slide motor has turned on.
  • Page 959 Jam Detection Sensor Locations 6-137 D143/D144 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 960: Electrical Component Defects

    Electrical Component Defects 6.5 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS 6.5.1 SENSORS  The CN numbers in the following table are the connector numbers on the IOB. Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name "Open Cover" is Open displayed. Right Door Open CN204/1 Switch "Open cover"...
  • Page 961 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Drum Gear Position Open/ CN222/ A11 SC390-04/SC396-04 Sensor-Y Shorted CN207/B14 Toner end cannot be Toner End Sensor - K Open CN207/B3 detected. Toner End Sensor - Y CN207/ Toner End Sensor - C Toner end is detected Toner End Sensor - Shorted...
  • Page 962 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Tray 1 Paper Feed Open/ CN230/A4 Jam A, B Sensor Shorted Tray 2 Paper Feed Open/ CN230/B4 Jam A, B Sensor Shorted Tray 1 is not detected Open when tray 1 is set. Tray 1 Set Switch CN224/A9 Tray 1 is detected when...
  • Page 963 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name CN227/ Open/ TD Sensor - C SC360-02 Shorted Open/ TD Sensor - M CN227/B7 SC360-03 Shorted CN227/ Open/ TD Sensor - Y SC360-04 Shorted Open Jam C (Jam 19) Fusing Exit Sensor CN204/12 Shorted...
  • Page 964 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name SC498 Printed image has Temperature/ CN234/ Open/ some problems such as Humidity Sensor 6, 8 Shorted rough image, dirty background, weak image or poor fusing. Thermopile Center, Open/ CN212/3, 6 SC541, SC551 Edge Shorted...
  • Page 965 Electrical Component Defects Sensor Name/ Active Condition Symptom Sensor Board Name Original Length CN313/5 Open/ Original paper size Sensor 2 Shorted cannot be detected. Original Length CN313/2 Open/ Original paper size Sensor 3 Shorted cannot be detected. Open SC120 CN318/2 Scanner HP Sensor Shorted SC121...

  • Page 966: Blown Fuse Conditions

    Electrical Component Defects 6.5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS Power Supply Unit Rating Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch 115V 220V - 240V No response. (5V power to the PSU is not 15A/250V 8A/250V supplied. No response. (5V power to the IPU and controller 15A/250V 6.3A/250V is not supplied.)

  • Page 967: Ac Drive Board

    Electrical Component Defects AC Drive Board Rating Fuse Symptom when turning on the main switch 115V 220V - 240V 15A/250V 8A/250V SC574-02 occurs. FU2*1 1A/250V 1A/250V No Voltage detection  For continued protection against risk of fire, replace only with same type and rating of fuse.

  • Page 968: Scanner Test Mode

    Scanner Test Mode 6.6 SCANNER TEST MODE 6.6.1 SBU TEST MODE Output the SBU test pattern with SP4-807-001 to make sure the scanner SBU control operates correctly. The SBU test pattern prints out after you have set the SP mode settings and pressed the start key.

  • Page 969: Energy Saving

    ENERGY SAVING R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P a ge D a t e A d de d /U pd at e d /N ew None WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 970 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 971: Energy Saver Modes

    Energy Save 7. ENERGY SAVING 7.1 ENERGY SAVE 7.1.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment. The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are at the default settings.

  • Page 972: Return To Stand-By Mode

    Energy Save Return to Stand-by Mode Low Power Mode The recovery time depends on the model and the region. C3c: 15 sec. or less C3d: 20 sec. or less Off/Sleep Mode Recovery time. C3c: 20 sec. or less C3d: 30 sec. or less Recommendation We recommend that the default settings should be kept.

  • Page 973: Energy Save Effectiveness

    Energy Save 7.1.2 ENERGY SAVE EFFECTIVENESS SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode. 8941-001: Operating mode 8941-002: Standby mode 8941-004: Low power mode 8941-005: Off/sleep mode With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount of energy that is used by the machine.

  • Page 974: Paper Save

    Paper Save 7.2 PAPER SAVE 7.2.1 EFFECTIVENESS OF DUPLEX/COMBINE FUNCTION Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment. 1. Duplex: Reduce paper volume in half! 2.

  • Page 975: Duplex + Combine

    Paper Save 3. Duplex + Combine: Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4! To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter. The total counter counts all pages printed. For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2. For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.

  • Page 976: How To Calculate The Paper Reduction Ratio

    Paper Save How to calculate the paper reduction ratio How to calculate the paper reduction ratio, when compared with Single-sided copying, with no 2-in-1 combine mode Paper reduction ratio (%) = Number of sheets reduced: A/Number of printed original images: B x Number of sheets reduced: A = Output pages in duplex mode/2 + Number of pages in Single-sided with combine mode + Number of pages in Duplex with combine mode x 3/2...
  • Page 977 D143/D144 SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 978 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 979 D143/D144 APPENDIX TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. APPENDICES ................1-1 1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ..............1-1 1.1.1 MAIN FRAME ................... 1-1 1.1.2 PRINTER ..................1-6 1.1.3 SCANNER ..................1-7 1.1.4 1 PASS ADF (1 PASS MODEL ONLY) ..........1-8 1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ..............1-9 1.2.1 PAPER FEED ...................
  • Page 980 2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES ........2-1 2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES ................2-1 2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS ..........2-1 Mainframe .................... 2-1 ARDF (D630) ..................2-4 Two-tray Paper Feed Unit (D580) ............2-5 1200-sheet LCT (D631) ................ 2-5 2000-sheet LCT (D581) ................ 2-6 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637/D636) .......
  • Page 981 3.9.1 INPUT CHECK TABLE ..............3-361 Copier....................3-361 Table 1: Paper Height Sensor ............3-365 Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) ..........3-366 Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ..........3-367 ARDF (D630) ................... 3-368 2000/3000-Sheet (Booklet) Finisher (D637, D636) ......3-370 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588) .............
  • Page 982 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 983 APPENDIX: SPECIFICATIONS R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY P ag e Dat e Ad d ed/ Upd at ed/ New None WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...
  • Page 984 WWW.SERVICE-MANUAL.NET...

  • Page 985: Appendices

    General Specifications 1. APPENDICES 1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 1.1.1 MAIN FRAME Configuration: Desktop Laser beam scanning & Dry electrostatic transfer system Print Process: 4 drums tandem method Number of scans: Scan: 600 dpi Resolution: Print: 600 dpi Scan: 600dpi / 10bits/pixel Gradation: Print: 600dpi / 4 bits/pixel Original type:...
  • Page 986 General Specifications Plain (ADF 1 to 1, LT/ A4 LEF) C3c: 45 cpm (color/black & white) C3d: 55 cpm (color/black & white) Thick 1 (169 g/m or less) C3c: 25 cpm (color/black & white) C3d: 25 cpm (color/black & white) Thick 2 (220 g/m or less) C3c: 17.5 cpm (color/black &...
  • Page 987 General Specifications (Refer to "Supported Paper Sizes".) Minimum Maximum Tray 1 A4/8.5" x 11" (LEF) A5 (LEF)/ Tray 2 A3/11" x 17" 8.5" x 11" By-pass 90 x 148 mm 305 x 600 mm Print Paper Size: A5 (LEF)/ Optional Tray A3/11"...
  • Page 988 General Specifications Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step) Fixed: North America Europe Zoom: 100% 100% 121% 115% 129% 122% 155% 141% 200% 200% 400% 400% Memory: Standard: 2 GB 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America) Power Source: 110 V, 60 Hz: More than 20A (for Taiwan) 220 V –...
  • Page 989 Less (*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT. The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricoh standard methodology. Dimensions (W x D x H): Copier: 670 x 682 x 760 mm (26.4" x 26.9" x 29.9") or less Copier + PFU or LCT* : 670 x 682 x 1020 mm (26.4"...

  • Page 990: Printer

    General Specifications 1.1.2 PRINTER PCL 6(XL)/5c RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream) Adobe PostScript 3 (Optional) Printer Languages: PDF Direct IPDS (Optional) PictBridge (Optional) MediaPrint: JPEG/TIFF PCL 5c: 300 x 300 dpi : Available only in B/W mode 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits) PCL 6: 600 x 600 dpi : Fast (1 bit), Standard (2 bits), Fine (4 bits) / Resolution and...

  • Page 991: Scanner

    General Specifications USB2.0 Type A and Type B: Standard Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T): Standard Gigabit Ethernet (1000 Base-T): Optional Host Interfaces: IEEE1284 parallel x 1: Optional IEEE802.11a/g g (Wireless LAN): Optional Bluetooth (Wireless): Optional Network Protocols: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching) 1.1.3 SCANNER Standard Scanner Main scan/Sub scan...

  • Page 992: Pass Adf (1 Pass Model Only)

    General Specifications 1.1.4 1 PASS ADF (1 PASS MODEL ONLY) System Single pass duplex document feeder Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Simplex Weight 40 to 128 g/m (11 to 34 lb.) Paper Size/Weight: Size A3 to A5, DLT to HLT Duplex Weight 52 to 128 g/m...

  • Page 993: Supported Paper Sizes

    Supported Paper Sizes 1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES 1.2.1 PAPER FEED North America BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit Size Paper T2/3/4 (W x L) 2000 1200 A3 W...
  • Page 994 Supported Paper Sizes Size Paper T2/3/4 (W x L) 2000 1200 Half Letter 5.5" x 8.5" Executive 7.25" x 10.5" Executive 10.5" x 7.25" F SEF 8" x 13" Foolscap 8.5" x 13" 8.25" x 13" 11" x 15" Folio SEF 10"...

  • Page 995: Europe/ Asia

    Supported Paper Sizes Remarks: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Supported: the user specifies the paper size. Supported: depends on a technician adjustment Not supported Europe/ Asia BT: By-pass Tray, T1: Tray 1, T2/3/4: Tray 2/3/4, LCT 2000: Large Capacity Tray: 2000-sheet, LCT 1200: Large Capacity Tray: 1200-sheet, DU: Duplex Unit Size Paper...
  • Page 996 Supported Paper Sizes Size Paper T2/3/4 (W x L) 2000 1200 Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Government 8.25" x 14" Legal SEF Half Letter 5.5" x 8.5" Executive 7.25" x 10.5" Executive 10.5" x 7.25" F SEF 8" x 13" Foolscap 8.5"...

  • Page 997: Paper Exit

    Supported Paper Sizes Remarks: Supported: the sensor detects the paper size. Supported: the user specifies the paper size. Supported: depends on a technician adjustment Not supported 1.2.2 PAPER EXIT 2000/3000 Sheet Booklet Finisher (D637/D636) MF: Main Frame, Prf: Proof, Clr: Clear, Shf: Shift, Stp: Staple, SS: Saddle Stitch, 2P: 2 Holes Punch, N2P: North Europe 2 Holes, 3P: 3 Holes Punch, Punch 4 P: 4 Holes Punch, N4P: North Europe 4 Holes Punch 2000/3000-sheet booklet finisher...
  • Page 998 Supported Paper Sizes 2000/3000-sheet booklet finisher Size Paper (W x L) Clr Shf Stp SS 2P/N2P 257 x B4 SEF 364 mm 182 x B5 SEF 257 mm 257 x B5 LEF 182 mm 128 x B6 SEF 182 mm Ledger 11"...
  • Page 999 Supported Paper Sizes 2000/3000-sheet booklet finisher Size Paper (W x L) Clr Shf Stp SS 2P/N2P 10" x 14" 8" x 10" 267 x 390 mm 195 x 16K SEF 267 mm 267 x 16K LEF 195 mm Custom 4.125" x Com10 Env.

  • Page 1000: 1000-Sheet Finisher (D588)

    Supported Paper Sizes *1: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less *2: Minimum 100 mm or more, Maximum 600 mm or less  Longer paper (feed length) than DLT (432 mm) is not guaranteed in this mode. *3: Minimum 100 mm for 2P, 230 mm for 3P, 255 mm for 4P, 125 mm for N4P *4: Corner stapling is not available in this mode.

This manual is also suitable for:

Aficio mp c5502D143D1444

Table of Contents